Muratec Fax Machine MFX 2530 User Manual

Mu r a tec MF X-2530

Op er a tin g In str u ction s

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Welcome …

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Trademarks

Muratec, the Muratec logo and all Muratec product names contained herein are

trademarks of Muratec America, Inc.

ENERGY STAR is a registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection

Agency.

As an ENERGY

TAR^®partner, Muratec America, Inc., has deter-

mined that this product meets the ENERGY

TAR^®guidelines for

energy efficiency.

Energy saving

Your machine can save the energy with its Energy Saving Mode.

In the Energy Saving Mode the printer will not use its fusing lamp. If your machine

receives a fax message or if any key is pressed your machine will automatically

wake up. The time for the machine to enter the Energy saving mode can be selected

from 1 to 240 minutes. For details, see “EasyStart,” page 1.17.

Super G3 is an extension of Group 3 fax technology standards,

allowing the use of high-speed ITU-T V.34 modems for 33.6 Kbps

transmission and high-speed protocols for rapid handshaking.

J BIG — Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, the new ITU-T stan-

dard image data compression method. As J BIG compresses the

data more efficiently than MMR, it is especially effective when

transmitting halftone (grayscale) image document.

This manual and any updates to it can be found online at w w w.m u r a tec.com

Go to the “Products” section of this site, then click on “MFX-2530”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Regulatory information

If problems arise

United States of America

If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remote it from your telephone

line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily

stop service. When practical, they will notify you before this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be

notified as soon as possible. When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and will be

informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) information

Ringer Equivalence Number (RENs): AC REN, 2.2B DC REN, 0.3.

;

This facsimile machine has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class

digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a

residential installation.

In the event repairs are ever needed on your fax machine, they should be done by Muratec America, Inc., or an

authorized representative of Muratec America, Inc. For information, contact the Muratec Customer Support Center at

972-364-3350 (from the U. S. only).

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance

with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a particular installation.

Canada

If this equipment causes interference in radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equip-

ment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Industry Canada (IC) regulations

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

IC Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 0.3.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class

interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications.

limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the

Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the bottom of this equipment is a label that contains, among

other information, the FCC registration number and REN for this equipment. If so requested, you must provide this infor-

mation to the telephone company.

Classe

prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques,” NMB-003 édictée par le Ministre

des Communications.

Notice: The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means

the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements.

The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.

An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug are provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be

connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part-68-compliant.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local

telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection.

Sometimes, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single-line individual service may be extended with a certified

connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with these conditions

may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.

Telephone company procedures

The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally

have to make changes in its equipment, operations or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the oper-

ation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow you to make any changes

necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the

supplier. Any equipment malfunction, or repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, may give the

telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.

If you have any questions about your telephone line, such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it, the

telephone company will provide this information upon request.

In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you about the

equipment which you have connected to your telephone line. Upon request of the telephone company, provide the FCC

registration number and the Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the equipment which is connected to your line. Both

of these numbers are listed on the equipment label attached to your fax machine.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines

and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected. This precaution may be particularly important in

rural areas.

Ca u tion : Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric

The sum of all RENS on your telephone line should be fewer than five (5) in order to assure proper service from the tele-

phone company. Sometimes, a sum of five (5) may not be usable on a given telephone line.

inspection authority or electrician.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number

of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combi-

nation of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5. The IC REN

for your equipment is 0.3.

Note:

This equipment is hearing-aid-compatible (HAC).

Notice: The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other

electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains,

either in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the

date and time it was sent and an identification of the business or other identity, or other individual sending

the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, entity or individual. For

instructions on programming this information (the “TTI”) into your fax machine, see pages xx–xx.

Type of service

Your fax is designed for use on standard-device telephone lines. The fax connects to the telephone line with a standard

line called the USOC RJ -11. Connection to telephone-company-provided coin service (central-office-implemented systems).

Connection to party line service is subject to State tariffs.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Limited warranty

his warranty is made by Muratec America, Inc. (hereafter referred to as “Muratec”). This warranty is

EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH ABOVE, AND EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW

^{MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES}, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR

^{PARTICULAR PURPOSE}, AND ANY WARRANTY ARISING FROM COURSE OF

^{DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE}), AND MURATEC EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES NOT STATED HEREIN. IN THE

^{EVENT THE PRODUCT IS NOT FREE FROM DEFECTS AS WARRANTED ABOVE}, THE CUSTOMER’ SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE

MURATEC

valid only on Muratec products purchased and used in the United States of America. This warranty

applies to the product only while owned and used by the original purchaser (“Customer”). If ownership of

the product is transferred, this warranty terminates. This warranty does not apply to any product in use

for rental purposes.

^{REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED ABOVE}. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL MURATEC BE LIABLE TO THE CUS-

TOMER, OR TO ANY USER, FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES,

LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE MURATEC

^PRODUCT, EVEN IF MURATEC OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Some States do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, and some

States do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclu-

sions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other

rights which vary from State to State.

This Muratec product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for ninety (90) days com-

mencing the da te of origina l Customer purcha se. If the product is defective in ma teria l a nd/or

workmanship (normal wear and tear excepted) during the warranty period, Muratec or its authorized rep-

resentative will, during Muratec’s established service availability hours, make necessary adjustments and

repairs, including, at Muratec’s option, installation of replacement parts. Muratec’s service availability

hours are 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM (Central time) Monday through Friday, excluding Muratec-recognized holi-

days. Muratec will complete the necessary adjustments and repairs within a reasonable time period, as

dictated by the nature of the problem and by Muratec’s service schedule. Replacement parts may have

been used and/or reconditioned. Parts that have been replaced will remain the property of Muratec. This

warranty is subject to the OBLIGATIONS and EXCLUSIONS set forth.

Obligations

1. This warranty will be honored only on presentation of the original dated authorized Muratec bill of sale

or Muratec dealer bill of sale or sales slip to an authorized Muratec service representative or service

center. For the name of your authorized service center, contact Muratec (from the United States, call

1-972-364-3350; from Canada, check your in-box materials for the number to call).

2. During the warranty period, the Customer must notify Muratec by telephone of any defective product

material and/or workmanship.

3. Transportation (including prepayment of freight and insurance charges) of the product to and from an

authorized service center, designated by Muratec, is the responsibility of the Customer.

4. If Muratec provides maintenance or responds to a call which is outside the scope of this warranty, such

maintenance shall be billed to the Customer at Muratec’s then-current rates for maintenance and

parts and shall be due and payable in full upon receipt of invoice.

Exclusions

1. This warranty shall not cover a product with missing or altered original identification marks.

2. This warranty applies only to products that the purchaser has properly installed, adjusted and oper-

ated in accordance with the instructions set forth in or provided with product literature. This warranty

does not apply to any product which has been subjected to tampering, alteration, misuse, abuse,

neglect, improper installation or transportation damage. Nor does it apply to costs for any service

requested for demonstration or to confirm proper operation of this product.

3. The warranty shall not apply to adjustments, repairs or replacements necessitated by any cause

beyond the control of Muratec (whether foreseeable or not) including, but not limited to, any malfunc-

tion, defects or failure caused by or resulting from any of the following: improper unpacking or

installation, unauthorized service or parts, or improper maintenance or cleaning, modification or repair

by the Customer, accident (including, without limitation, unavoidable accidents), fire, flood or other

Acts of God, improper telephone or electrical power or surges thereof, interconnection with or use of

non-compatible equipment or supplies (including paper), or placement of the product in an area which

does not conform to Muratec space, electrical and/or environmental requirements.

4. Muratec will not be required to make adjustments, repairs or replacements if the product is installed or

used at a location deemed by Muratec to be hazardous to health or safety, or if Muratec is not provided

with free and reasonable access to the product and a telephone during service availability hours, or if

the product location is not accessible by an authorized Muratec service vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety information

Laser Safety

For the United States

This is a digital machine which operates by means of a laser. There is no possibility

of danger from the laser, provided the machine is operated according to the instruc-

tions in this manual.

CDRH regulation

This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under the Radiation

Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990.

Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is

reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food

and Drug Administration of the U. S. Department of Health and Human Services

(DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation.

Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective hous-

ing, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user

operation.

This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product. This means the machine does

not produce hazardous laser radiation.

The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must

be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.

Internal Laser Radiation

Maximum Average Radiant Power: 19.5 (µW) at the laser aperture of the print head

unit.

CAUTION: Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other

than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation expo-

sure.

Wavelength: 770-795 nm

This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 5mW and

the wavelength is 770-795nm.

This product employs a Class IIIb Laser Diode that emits an invisible laser beam.

The Laser Diode and Scanning Polygon Mirror are incorporated in the print head

unit.

Laser Safety Label

A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.

The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM.

Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances.

ID Label

Laser safety label

Laser Aperture of

the Print Head Unit

IC Label

Print Head

This figure shows the view inside the

Right Door with the Imaging Unit

removed.

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Before using your Muratec machine

Clea n

Where to set up your machine

Dust buildup can damage your machine.

Follow these guidelines when setting up your machine:

Periodically clean your machine as described in the

operating instructions. Do n ot u se a d u st cover ,

which can cause damaging overheating.

Aw a y fr om d ir ect su n ligh t

To avoid overheating, set up your machine away

from direct sunlight or a heater.

Nea r a p h on e ja ck

Your machine uses a standard (modular) telephone

jack, also known as an RJ -11.

Level, a n d vibr a tion -fr ee

To avoid an injury or damage to the machine, set the

machine up in a level, vibration-free location.

40 cm

(15.7 inches)

Sp a ce a r ou n d th e m a ch in e

Avoid extr em e h igh / low tem p er a tu r e

Use your machine within the temperature range of

50ºF to 95ºF (10ºC to 35ºC).

To ensure proper ventilation and easy

operation, set up the machine in an area

that meets the minimum requirements for

clearance as illustrated below.

50 - 95 F

22 cm

(8.7 inches)

10 cm

(3.9 inches)

10 cm

(3.9 inches)

35 cm

(13.8 inches)

Aw a y fr om a television or r a d io

Many appliances and office equipment, including

televisions, radios, copy machines, air conditioners

and computers, can generate electronic noise that

can interfere with the operation of your machine.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power requirements

General Precautions

P lu g in th e p ow er cor d

Never d isa ssem ble you r m a ch in e!

Plug the power cord carefully and completely into a

wall outlet. Do not leave any portion of the electrical

cord’s metal plugs exposed. Doing so could cause a

fire and poses a risk of electrical shock.

Disassembling your machine can cause serious

injury to you and damage to your machine. If service

is required, call your authorized Muratec dealer.

Do n ot sh a r e a n exten sion cor d

con n ector w ith oth er p lu gs

It can cause electrical shock.

Keep a w a y fr om liqu id s

Keep liquids and metal pins or other objects away

from your machine. If something falls into the

machine, remove the plug from the outlet and call

your authorized Muratec dealer.

Never h a n d le you r m a ch in e or

p ow er cor d w ith w et h a n d s

Never touch your machine or power cord if your

hands are wet.

Do n ot sh a r e a n ou tlet w ith a la r ge

a p p lia n ce

High-consumption appliances such as a refrigerator

or air conditioner can cause “draw-downs” which

could damage your machine.

Du r in g electr ica l stor m s, d iscon n ect

th e p lu g fr om th e ou tlet

Electrical storms can cause electrical shock or

damage to the machine.

120 VAC ou tlet

Use a standard three-pronged 120 V electrical outlet

to power your machine. Using any other electrical

outlet will cause damage to your machine.

AC 120V

For d om estic u se on ly

Never use your machine outside the country in

which you purchased it. Doing so may violate

telecommunication and safety regulations of that

country, and variations in electrical and telephone

standards can cause poor performance and damage

to your machine.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Do n ot p u t fu r n itu r e or equ ip m en t on

th e p ow er cor d

Do not put anything on or over the electrical power

cord, and do not route the power cord under rugs or

carpets. Doing so can damage the power cord or fax,

and can cause fire or electrical shock.

Storing and handling toner bottle

To avoid damage to your machine and to assure the best performance possible, fol-

low these guidelines when storing and handling toner bottles:

Stor e th e ton er bottle

Store toner bottles at a constant temperature within a range of 50ºF to 95ºF (10ºC to

35ºC). Do not store bottles in locations subject to extreme fluctuation of

temperature and humidity.

Avoid tem p er a tu r e flu ctu a tion s

Sudden changes in temperature can cause damag-

ing condensation to form inside your machine.

Do n ot sta n d th e bottle on its en d a n d d o n ot stor e it u p sid e

d ow n .

Do n ot op en th e p r otective ba g of th e bottle u n til you a r e

r ea d y to in sta ll th e bottle.

Allow clea r a n ce a r ou n d th e ou tlet

Don’t stack boxes or furniture around the outlet.

Do n ot stor e bottles in a r ea s of:

•

Direct sunlight

Dusty conditions

Near floppy disks or other computer media, computer screens, or any other mate-

rials sensitive to magnetic fields.

Do n ot bu r n ton er bottles!

Use su p p lies m a n u fa ctu r ed

The toner powder is extremely flammable. Exposure to

flame can cause toner bottles to burn or explode, causing

serious injury.

sp ecifica lly for Mu r a tec m a ch in es

Using toner cartridges and other supplies that are

not manufactured specifically for Muratec machines

may affect the operation of your unit.

Be ca r efu l n ot to get th e ton er p ow d er in

you r eyes.

If the toner powder gets in your eyes, wash your eyes well

and call a doctor.

Keep bottles a w a y fr om w a ter or oil.

Do n ot exp ose bottles to d ir ect su n ligh t.

Do n ot exp ose ton er bottles to sta tic or

oth er electr ica l sh ock .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

Thank you for choosing the Muratec MFX-2530.

Symbol and terms (Operating tips)

In this manual, the following symbols and terms are used, please make sure you

know what they mean.

The Muratec MFX-2530 is a multi-function machine, combining fac-

simile and copier features.

These instructions are divided into the following sections.

CAUTION

This symbol indicates how to avoid personal injury.

Im p or ta n t:

This describes conditions or incorrect operations that could cause

damage to your machine.

•

“Gettin g sta r ted ” (page 1.1) describes how to set up your

machine, operating tips and some important settings that you

should perform before using your machine.

Note:

This describes helpful hints, restrictions, and how to avoid diffi-

culties.

•

“Cop y fea tu r es” (page 2.1) describes the various copying features.

[

]

Keys that appear at the lower parts on the LCD. To press this key,

use the item select key.

“Fa x fea tu r es” (page 3.1) describes the various faxing features.

“Com m on fea tu r es” (page 4.1) describes the common features for

“

”

Items that appear on the LCD.

copy and fax.

BOLD WORDS

Keys built into the machine’s operation panel.

•

“J u st in ca se … ” (page 5.1) helps you if you ever have a problem

with your machine. It also tells you how to give your machine the

kind of easy, sensible care that should keep troubles to a minimum.

LCD

The Liquid Crystal Display. It shows the machine’s status, error

messages and function menu, etc.

Document

A document is the original sheet(s) of paper you send or copy on

your machine.

“Ap p en d ix & In d ex” — (page 6.1) describes the specifications of

your machine, the appendix and index.

This shows the direction of the document. See “About

symbol” next column.

and

Paper

A paper is the recording paper for printing.

This shows the direction of the paper.

Here’s an example. If we say “press MENU,

, 0, 7, [En ter ]” …

… you’d press MENU

… then

… then 0 (the numeric key zero)

… then

… and then Item select key correspond to [Enter].

Im p or ta n t: Even though our example above includes commas, do not enter them

into the machine. Those characters appear in our instructions to sepa-

rate one number from the other. They do not need to be entered into

your machine.

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About

and

symbol

and

symbols indicate the direction of your document.

When the document has a length longer than its width, we use symbol

When the document has a length shorter than its width, we use symbol

viii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of contents

Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i

Limited warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ii

Laser Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

Internal Laser Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

For the United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

Laser Safety Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

Before using your Muratec machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv

Where to set up your machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv

Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v

General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v

Storing and handling toner bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vi

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii

Symbol and terms (Operating tips) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii

Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.17

Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.17

Entering initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.17

How to set the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.19

Acceptable document size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.19

Things not to put in your fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.19

How to set the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.19

Ba sic cop y fea tu r es

Some guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1

Select document type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1

Automatic document size detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1

Scanning the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2

Select paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3

Rotate copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3

Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3

Reset the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3

Basic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4

Reduce / Enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5

Auto Reduce/Enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5

Reduce/Enlarge with a preset rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5

Zoom Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5

Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6

Using the bypass tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7

About

and

symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viii

Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix

Gettin g sta r ted

Parts of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3

Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4

Panel display (Liquid Crystal Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6

Changing Fax/Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6

Copy standby display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6

Advanced copy menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6

Fax standby display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7

Communication options menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7

Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8

AC power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8

ENERGY SAVING key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8

Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.9

Recording paper size and capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.9

Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.9

Changing the paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10

Installing / Changing the printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.12

Entering characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.15

Using one-touch keys to enter characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.15

Using code to enter characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.15

EasyStart (Initial setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.17

Clearing stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.17

Ad va n ced cop y fea tu r es

Quick index for major functions (Copy mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.9

Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.10

Image Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.11

Series Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.13

Erase center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.13

Erase border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.14

TopUp Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.14

Binding Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.15

Adjust the binding margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.15

Directional magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.15

Directional ratio(%) magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.15

Directional size (inch) magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16

Positive / Negative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Last copy job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17

Mixed length copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18

Duplexed copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.19

Making single copies from 2-sided documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.19

Making duplex copies from two 1-sided documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.20

Making duplex copies from 2-sided documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.21

Making duplex copies from facing pages of the book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.21

Booklet copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.23

Making a booklet copy from eight 1-sided documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.23

Ad va n ced fa x fea tu r es

Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.11

Using one-touch numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.12

Using speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.16

Using call group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.21

EasyDial directory dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.22

Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.24

Broadcasting basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.24

Delayed broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.24

Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.25

Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.26

Printing a list of batch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.27

Storing a document for batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.27

Printing a list of documents stored in batch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.28

Printing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.28

Job Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.29

Reviewing or canceling a command for faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.29

View the result of fax transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.30

View the reserved printing jobs for out-of-paper reception . . . . . . . . . .3.31

View the reserved copy jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.31

Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.32

Duplexed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.32

Mixed length transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.33

Enlarge transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.33

Fax & Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.34

Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.34

Transferring documents (Fax forwarding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.36

Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.38

Separate each received document (Separator Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.39

Setting the activity journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.40

Setting the reports: TCRs and RCRs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.40

Numbering pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.41

OneLine + distinctive ring detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.42

Call request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.43

F-Code communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.44

F-Code: an introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.44

Creating or modifying an F-Code box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.44

Printing a list of F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.49

Using a security box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.49

Using a bulletin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.50

Erasing an empty F-Code box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.51

F-Code transmission and polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.52

Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.54

Using the power of programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.54

Programming a broadcast / group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.55

Ch a n gin g th e d efa u lt cop y settin gs

A. Erase border setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.25

B. Erasing center setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.26

C. Binding margin setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.26

D. Sorting copy setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.27

E. User settings (for copy mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.27

F. Print the copy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.30

Ba sic fa x fea tu r es

Some guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1

Resolution, grayscale and contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1

Entering a pause character when dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1

TTI select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2

Automatic document size detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2

Select scanning size to be sent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2

Sending a fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3

Using memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3

Sending a fax from the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3

Sending a fax from the FBS glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4

Sending a fax using monitor/call or a handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5

Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6

Canceling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6

Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7

Reception modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7

Out-of-paper reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8

Using as a Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9

Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9

Dialing with the monitor speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9

EasyDial directory dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9

Checking the fax reception mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9

Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9

Changing the dialing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9

Adjusting handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming regular polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.56

Programming a batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.57

Programming an F-Code transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.57

Programming F-Code polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.58

Erasing a programmable one-touch key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.59

Fax dialing with programmable one-touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.60

Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.61

Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.61

Masking the PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.62

Setting security transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.64

Setting for use with a closed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.65

Setting Block Junk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.65

J. Printing of the machine setting list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10

K. Settings for printer controller (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10

L. Print the list of documents stored in memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.11

M. Energy saving release time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.11

N. Department codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.12

J u st in ca se ...

Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1

If an original document jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1

If a printout jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2

Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.6

Caring for your machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.8

Corrective cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.8

Cleaning the FBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.9

If you have unsatisfactory printout quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.9

In the event of a power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10

Memory back up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10

Power failure report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11

The machine is not functioning as designed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.15

If you cannot make clear copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16

Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.17

Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.19

General questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.19

Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.19

We’re here to help you! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.19

Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.21

Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.21

Ch a n gin g th e d efa u lt fa x settin gs

Settings for transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.69

Scan settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.69

Setting ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.69

Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.70

Quick Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.70

Image rotate transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.71

Settings for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.72

Print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.72

Setting ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.73

Cassette for fax reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.74

Settings for dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.75

Changing the dialing pause length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.75

Changing redial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.75

Settings for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.76

Adjust the monitor speaker’s volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.76

Panel auto reset time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.76

Printing your fax settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.76

Ap p en d ix a n d in d ex

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.1

Combination chart for copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.4

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.6

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.11

Com m on settin gs

Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1

Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3

Machine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6

A. Confirm the Counter for total printed pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6

B. Protect passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6

C. Copy protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.7

D. Soft Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.7

E. Sleep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.7

F. Auto power off mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8

G. Adjust the sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8

H. Paper for list printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10

I. 2-Bin tray (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Parts of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1

Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4

Panel display (Liquid Crystal Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6

Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8

Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9

Installing / Changing the printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12

Entering characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15

EasyStart (Initial setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17

How to set the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Parts of the machine

Note: Any terms used here that are unclear to you right now will be explained in

Sid e cover — Open this to fix printout jams in the cassette.

detail in the coming pages.

Byp a ss tr a y — Use this when you want to copy onto transparency film,

thick paper, envelopes or post cards.

P r in ter cover r elea se (R1) — Pull up this to open the printer cover.

P r in ter cover — Open this to fix printout jams or change the drum cartridge.

F u ser cover r elea se (R2) — Push this to open the fuser cover.

F u ser cover — Open this to fix printout jams in the fuser.

Or igin a l d ocu m en t exit — Where the original document comes out.

Docu m en t tr a y — Holds original documents.

Docu m en t gu id e — Adjust this to fit the width of the original document so it

will feed properly into the machine.

ADF cover — Open this by using the ADF cover release to remove original docu-

ment paper jams.

ADF cover r elea se — Pull up this to open the ADF cover.

Docu m en t in ser t in d ica tion la m p — The green arrow will appear when the

document is set. If the document is jammed, it will blink.

Con tr ol Pa n el — The keys you use to operate your machine. (See pages

1.4–1.5 for more details.)

P la ten cover — Open this to scan an original document using the flatbed scan-

ner (FBS).

Mu lti p u r p ose ca ssette — Where you put the recording paper. Holds up to

275 sheets of various sized paper.

AC p ow er sw itch — Turns your machine on and off. Usually it should be on. (If

it is off, the machine cannot receive a fax message.)

2n d p a p er ca ssette — Where you put the recording paper. Holds up to 550

sheets, either letter or legal-sized paper.

Recor d in g p a p er size / level in d ica tion la m p — Place the paper size sticker

here. The lamp shows the level of the current paper supply without requiring

you to open the paper cassette. It will blink when the remaining papers become

few and will light when the paper is completely gone.

1.1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

ETHERNET ja ck — Where you plug in the network cable, when you use the

optional network printer controller.

AC p ow er ja ck — Where you plug in the AC power cord.

Pa p er tr a y — Where the received fax message or copied paper emerges.

22 23 24 25 26

Ton er bottle cover — Open this to change the toner bottle.

RS-232C in ter fa ce p or t — Where you plug in the RS-232C cable, when you

use the optional RS-232C interface kit.

LINE

P HONE ja ck for op tion — Where you plug in the telephone line cord

and the optional handset, when you use the optional second phone line mod-

ule.

LAN-F AX ETHERNET ja ck — Where you plug in the network cable, when you

use the optional total server kit.

P RINTER PARALLEL p or t — Where you plug in the printer cable, when you use

the optional printer controller kit.

LINE ja ck — Where you plug in the telephone line cord. (The other end of the

cord plugs into a wall telephone jack.)

P HONE2 ja ck — If you connect a second telephone to your machine, this is

where you plug in the cord.

P HONE1 ja ck — Where you plug in the optional handset.

1.2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Options

Pa p er ca ssette (3r d , 4th , 5th ) — Each cassette capacity is 550 sheets.

La r ge ca p a city ca ssette — Its capacity is 2,700 sheets.

Ha n d set — Used for voice communication.

Sh ift tr a y — Shifts and sorts printed papers in sort copy.

2-Bin tr a y — Sorts copied papers and received fax messages.

Du p lex u n it — Used for duplex copy, booklet copy or duplex reception.

P r in ter con tr oller a n d TWAIN d r iver — Adds the PC printer feature and

the scanner feature to your machine.

Netw or k p r in ter con tr oller — Adds the network printer feature to your

machine.

In for m a tion ser ver k it — Adds the following features to your machine;

internet fax, network scanning, network printing, direct PC-FAX communica-

tion, etc.

Pa ge cou n ter — Counts the total printed pages.

Secon d p h on e lin e m od u le — Adds one more line and makes it possible to

communicate with two machines at the same time with super G3.

Ad d ition a l Mem or y (8 MB, 24 MB) — Able to add one or two memories to

the standard 16 MB memory.

1.3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Control panel

5 6 7

9 10

23 22

19 18 17 16

COMMUNICATION ligh t — Glows when the fax machine is communicating with

another machine.

MEMORY RECEIVE ligh t — Glows when the machine is receiving an incoming

fax document into its electronic memory.

CONTRAST — Press to adjust the contrast level.

RESOLUTION

—

In Fax mode: RESOLUTION

Press to toggle among the three resolution modes and 256-level grayscale.

Nu m er ic k eyp a d — Just like the numeric keys on a regular tone-dialing

phone. Use these to dial phone and fax numbers and to enter numbers when

you’re setting up the machine.

In Copy mode: DOCUMENT

Press to toggle among P HOTO, P HOTO/TEXT and AUTO.

SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX — Starts a speed-dialing operation, which you finish by

pushing three of the keys on the numeric keypad. Also displays one-touch and

speed-dial entries sorted alphanumerically, as in a telephone directory.

REDUCE/ENLARGE — Press this key to choose one of several preset

reduction/enlargement rates for copy or enlarge transmission. (See page 2.5

or 3.33 for more information.)

J OB REVIEW

COMM. CANCEL — Press to review reserved fax commands, com-

Liqu id cr ysta l d isp la y (LCD) — Shows the machine’s status and lets you

see what you’re programming into the machine.

munication results, reserved printing jobs for the out-of-paper reception, or

reserved copy jobs. Also, press to cancel the fax commands.

MENU — Press to set the advanced futures or settings.

INTERRUP T — Press to interrupt the current printing job and make copies.

LCD con tr a st volu m e — Use to adjust the contrast of the LCD.

Ma cr o k eys — Programming the Macro keys (M1 – M6) can reduce many

steps of the operation to a simple press of a key. You can “teach” the Macro

keys to carry out one of the several operations (see page 4.3).

Sta tu s ligh ts

ALARM ligh t — Glows when a problem occurs during fax communication,

printing or scanning.

1.4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Select fu n ction k eys — These keys correspond to the items at the lower

On e-tou ch k eys — The keys labeled 01-78 offer one-touch dialing conve-

nience. You also can use the keys labeled 79-84 for programmable functions:

this allows you to teach your machine an advanced multi-step function just

once, then recall the function at any time by pressing one of these keys.

part on the LCD. Press to choose item at the lower part on LCD.

F AX — Press to change from Copy mode to Fax mode.

Soft Keys — Shortcut keys. Any function that can be turned on or off can be

programmed into these four keys. If the light above one of these keys glows,

this indicates the setting that’s been programmed into it (see page 4.1) is

turned on. These keys are programmed at the factory to turn the following

functions on or off:

COP Y — Press to change from Fax mode to Copy mode.

Soft Key 1: STAMP — Press this key to set the machine to stamp each original

document or page automatically when the machine transmits it successfully.

Soft Key 2: REP ORT — Press to turn the confirmation report feature on or off

for the next fax transmission.

Soft Key 3:MONITOR/CALL — Press to turn the monitor speaker on or off. When

it’s on, it allows you to hear the call you’re making. When using this feature,

you can only hear the communication taking place. You cannot be heard

unless you use a handset (optional). When sending a fax, this key also acti-

vates the call request feature.

Soft Key 4: MEMORY TRANSMIT — Select which transmission mode your

machine uses, whether from memory or from the document feeder.

START — Press to begin a fax communication or copying.

STOP — An all-purpose “Whoa!” key. Stops the current operation and ejects a

document from the document feeder.

RESET — Press to cancel the settings.

Cu r sor k ey — Use in various scenes, to select an item on LCD or the enter

the numbers when you are setting up the machine.

ENERGY SAVING — Press to enter the Sleep mode. If you press it for 3 seconds,

it will be in the Auto power off mode. Press this key again to return to

standby mode. (See page 1.8 for details.)

NEXT — When the frame of the item at the lower part on LCD is shown with

double or more lines, it means that you can select more items. Press this key

to show the more items.

1.5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Panel display (Liquid Crystal Display)

Changing Fax/Copy mode

When you use your machine as a copier, for making copies or setting copy functions,

Advanced copy menu display

To access the advanced copy menu, press MENU.

press COP Y. As a facsimile, for fax transmission or setting fax functions, press F AX.

Advanced Copy

Use cursor to select

Advanced Copy

Use cursor to select

The LCD shows the machine’s status, error messages and function menu.

item.

Combine

Repeat

Series Copy Nega/Posi

EraseBorder

(1/2)

Margin

D.Mag.

item.

(2/2)

DuplexCopy

Mix Length

Booklet

Copy standby display

Last Job

EraseCenter TopUp Copy

Copy Set Mach Set Enter

Set

Copy Ready

100%

Note: To access the copy setting menu, press [Cop y Set]. (See page 2.25.)

To access the machine setting menu, press [Ma ch Set]. (See page 4.6.)

Function Icon list

Combine

Binding Margin

Duplex copies

Mix Length

Booklet copies

Sorting

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Directional

Magnification

Image Repeat

Series copy

Erase border

Erase center

Negative/Positive

Last copy job

Top up copy

Operational status or messages, paper size currently selected and

reduce/enlarge ratio.

Currently selected paper cassette and the machine’s status.

Various items are displayed according to the operation. When it is shown with

double or more lines, it means that you can select more items. Press NEXT to

show the more items.

Shift sort

Copy reduction or enlargement ratio.

Note: Booklet copies function requires an optional duplex print unit, and shift sort

function requires an optional shift tray.

Number of copies.

Note: When you select an item on the LCD, it becomes highlighted.

Items appearing with gray cannot be selected.

In this area, displays the selected function’s icon or error message. When you

set the copy function(s), the icon corresponds with the selected function is dis-

played. See right column for details.

1.6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Select function keys

Fax standby display

You can select the following function in the fax standby mode. Pressing NEXT, they

will be changed as shown below. Also, these key indications will be changed accord-

ing the function you are using.

Fax Ready

Nov 5 2001

Fax Ready

13:30

Memory 100%

Fax Ready

Nov 5 2001

Fax Ready

13:30

Memory 100%

• Redial – See page 3.6.

• Group – See page 3.21.

• Broadcast – See page 3.24.

Redial Group Broadcas

Machine’s status.

Press NEXT.

Fax reception mode.

Various items are displayed according to the operation. When it is shown with

double or more lines, it means that you can select more items. Press NEXT to

show the more items.

Fax Ready

Nov 5 2001

Fax Ready

• Enlarge Tx – See page 3.33.

• Scan Size – See page 3.2.

• TTI – See page 3.2.

13:30

Memory 100%

Amount of memory available.

This area displays the operational status, items and any messages.

EnlrgeTx ScanSize TTI

Communication options menu display

To access the communication options menu, press MENU.

Press NEXT.

Communication Options

Use cursor to select

item.

Fax Ready

Nov 5 2001

Fax Ready

• # of Pages – See page 3.41.

13:30

Memory 100%

Delayed Tx Cont Polling

Batch Tx

Polling

F-Code Tx

FCodePolling

Fax & Copy

Duplex Tx

Mix Length

Fax Set Mach Set Enter

#OfPages

(We’ll explain these functions in “Advanced fax features,” beginning on page 3.11.)

Note: To access the fax setting menu, press [Fa x Set]. (See page 3.69.)

To access the machine setting menu, press [Ma ch Set]. (See page 4.6.)

1.7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Power On

Your machine has the AC power switch and ENERGY SAVING key as the power switch.

ENERGY SAVING key

AC power switch

When you use your machine for the first time, turn on the AC power switch. The

markings are international standards: I means on, O means off. It should be always

On. Only when your machine will be not used for a long time or will be moved, turn

it off.

Sleep mode

When pressing ENERGY SAVING, it will put out lights of the LCD display and all lamps

and the printer will be stopped (in the Sleep mode). It cuts down the power con-

sumption. When the Sleep mode is On, your machine will be in the Sleep mode

automatically when 15 minutes has passed after you pressed any key last. (The

time can be set within 1 - 100 minutes, see page 4.7.)

Note: If you turn it off, your machine will be not able to receive a fax message.

ENERGY SAVING key will turn to green during the Sleep mode.

As any key is pressed in the Sleep mode, your machine will wake up.

Auto Power Off mode

When pressing ENERGY SAVING for 3 seconds, your machine will be in the Auto

power off mode. Also when your machine has been in the Sleep mode for 60 min-

utes, it will be in the Auto power off mode automatically. (The time can be set

within 30 - 120 minutes, see page 4.8.)

All power switches will be turned off in the Auto power off mode, however your

machine can transmit the data stored in the memory and print out the received doc-

ument. It is effective for cutting down the power consumption at night or on

holidays.

ENERGY SAVING key will turn to red during the Auto power off mode.

As ENERGY SAVING is pressed in the Auto power off mode, your machine will wake

up.

1.8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Loading paper

Recording paper size and capacity

Loading paper

Your machine’s multi purpose cassette can hold up to 275 sheets and the 2nd cas-

sette can hold up to 550 sheets at a time.

Ca ssette

Pa p er size

Ca p a city

Multi purpose cassette

Letter

, Legal , Ledger

, A3 , B4

, A5 , A6

F4 , Postcard , Custom-sized*¹

275 sheets

Note: Regarding the bypass tray, see page 2.7.

Half-letter

, B5

Loading the multi purpose cassette, 2nd, 3rd, 4th or 5th paper

cassette

DL , COM10 , Monarch

Executive

Pull the cassette toward you.

2nd - 5th*²paper cassette Letter

, Legal , Ledger

550 sheets

1 sheets

A3 , B4 , A4

, F4

Bypass tray

Letter

, Legal , Ledger

Push down the bottom plate inside

the cassette so it clicks and the plate

and the bottom of the cassette are

even.

Half-letter

, A3 , B4

, A5 , A6

F4 , Postcard , Custom-sized*¹

, B5

DL , COM10 , Monarch

Executive

Large capacity cassette*³

Letter , A4 , B5

2,700 sheets

5.5 - 17.0 inches × 3.6 - 11.7 inches (Width × Length)

3rd, 4th and 5th paper cassettes are optional.

Large capacity cassette is optional.

Insert the paper into the cassette

with face up.

If it is the multi purpose cassette,

proceed to step 4.

If it is the 2nd, 3rd, 4th or 5th cas-

sette, skip to step 5.

Note: Make sure the stack of paper

isn’t higher than the limit

mark.

1.9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Changing the paper size

Adjust the side guide and the rear

guide for the paper by sliding them.

You should tell the paper size to the machine, when you change the paper size. Set

the paper size after loading new papers in the cassette.

Note: Slide the side guide by press-

ing the green part.

Note: When you want to change the paper size of the 2nd, 3rd, 4th or 5th paper

cassette, please contact your authorized Muratec dealer.

Slide the rear guide by press-

ing both sides of it.

Changing the paper size of the multi purpose cassette

You can change the paper size of the multi purpose cassette only by moving the

guides in the cassette (see page 1.9).

Close the cassette.

To set the paper size:

Paper size has changed.

Set paper size.

Loading the large capacity cassette (Option)

When you put papers in the cassette, the LCD

shows:

Letter

H.LTR

Legal

11x17

Pull the cassette toward you.

When using the standard paper size:

(1) Select the paper size using the cursor key.

Push down the bottom plate inside the cassette so it clicks and the plate and

the bottom of the cassette are even.

Paper

Other

Enter

(2) Press [En ter ].

Paper size has changed.

Set paper size.

Insert the paper into the cassette

along the right side with face up.

When using the non standard paper size:

(1) Press [Oth er ].

Note: Make sure the stack of paper

isn’t higher than the limit

mark.

(2) Select the paper size using the cursor key.

(3) Press [En ter ].

Paper

Standard Enter

Note: If you want to go back to the standard

paper select display, press [Sta n d a r d ].

Paper size has changed.

Move cursor and enter

value.

When using the special sized paper:

(1) Press [Oth er ].

Paper range

11.0"

Insert the paper into the cassette

along the left side with face up.

H. (5.5-17.0)

V. (3.6-11.7)

8.5"

(2) Select “Cu stom ” using the cursor key.

Note: You can register three types of special

Note: Make sure the stack of paper

isn’t higher than the limit

mark.

Enter

size as you want.

(3) Press [En ter ].

(4) Enter the horizontal and vertical size of the paper using the numeric keypad.

Note: You can also enter the paper size using

Note: To change Horizontal / Vertical, use

(5) Press [En ter ].

and

of the cursor key.

Close the cassette.

and

1.10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

The machine returns to standby mode.

When you set the “Custom” paper, press RESET for standby mode.

Setting the paper type

When you set transparency films or thick papers in the multi purpose cassette, set

the paper type.

Press COP Y to change to the copy mode, if needed.

Press NEXT, then press [Ch g.P p r.].

Press [P p r.Typ e] after confirming the 1st cassette is selected.

Paper Size Select

Set paper type.

Select the paper type using the cursor key.

Then press [En ter ].

Plain

PasteBoard

OHP

Env./Post

Note: Pressing RESET, the machine returns to

standby mode.

Enter

1.11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Installing / Changing the printing supplies

Your machine prints incoming faxes and copies with a laser print engine. The

engine requires two types of printing supplies (sometimes also called consumables):

Installing / changing the drum cartridge

•

The drum cartridge — It yields 74,000 normal letter-sized printouts (see

“Specifications,” page AI.1). By “normal,” we’re referring to the amount of text

and/or graphics on each page. This is based on an industry-standard test docu-

ment.

Pull up the printer cover release (R1)

and open the printer cover.

If you change the old drum cartridge

to the new one, proceed to step 2.

Otherwise, skip to step 3.

•

The toner bottle — It yields 11,000 “normal”, letter-sized printouts (see

“Specifications,” page AI.1).

Unpacking

Unpack the new drum cartridge from its car-

ton. Then remove the seal from the cartridge.

Im p or ta n t: Never touch the electrical contacts inside the printer cover and

under the drum cartridge, as an electrostatic discharge may

damage the machine.

Electrical Contacts

Seal

Remove the packing materials (securing tapes and sponge(rear)) from the

drum cartridge.

Tapes

Grasp the green handles and gently

pull out the old drum cartridge. Then

lift it out by the handle on top.

Sponge

1.12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Installing / changing the toner bottle

Shake the new drum cartridge hori-

zontally.

Note: Use ONLY the specified toner for this machine. Using any other toner could

result in damage.

Note: Be careful not to drop the toner bottle from 1 m (about 40 inches) or more

height. It may cause damage to the toner bottle.

Open the toner bottle cover.

Align the green labels on both ends of

the new drum cartridge with the

green labels on the rails of the

machine and set it to the machine.

Gently pull out the used bottle.

Note: If the toner bottle cover is opened

while the bottle is turning, the

bottle may be locked in place. If

this happens, close the cover, wait

for the bottle to stop, and try

again.

Grasp the handles and push the drum

cartridge into the machine until it clicks.

Close the printer cover.

Sharply tap the new toner bottle against a

desk or other hard surface four or five

times. Then turn the toner bottle upside

down and tap it the same way again.

1.13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Shake the new toner bottle well and turn

it over lengthwise five times.

Note: Make sure to carry out the proce-

dure above to agitate the toner

before installing the toner bottle

in case the toner has settled.

With the seal on the toner bottle facing

up, slowly peel off the seal as shown at

right:

Note: Be careful, some toner may puff

out from the bottle.

With the “UP” marking on top, insert

and push the bottle up to the black

line on it.

Close the toner bottle cover.

Note: When the toner bottle cover is

closed, the machine automatically

starts replenishing the supply of

toner. During this period, do not

attempt to turn off the power switch

or open the printer cover.

1.14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Entering characters

Some settings give you a chance to enter characters; for TTI, remote fax’s name or

others. To enter letters or other characters, use one-touch keys, numeric keypad or

code keys.

Using CODE to enter characters

You can enter characters with the one-touch key, and also with the CODE.

To use the CODE to enter characters:

Using one-touch keys to enter characters

01:111-222-3333

Location I.D. Code [

＿

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

]

Use the one-touch keys to enter letters and other non-numeric characters.

When the machine prompts you to enter a

name, press [Ch a r a .] and select “Code” by

cursor key, then press [En ter ]. You’ll see the

display as shown at right:

01:111-222-3333

Location I.D. Upper case

＿

Location:

To type an upper-case letter, press [Ch a r a .] and

select “Upper case” by using the cursor key, and then

press [En ter ]. You’ll see the display as shown at

right:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

Chara. Clear

Enter

The word “Upper case” means the machine will enter

Find the character you want to enter in the chart below.

only upper-case letters. If you press R, the machine

Chara. Clear

01:111-222-3333

Location I.D. Lower case

Enter

will see it as an

(not an r).

Second keypress

”

“

’

(

)

;

[

—

% &

To type a lower-case letter, press [Ch a r a .] and select

“Lower case” by using the cursor key, and then press

[En ter ]. You’ll see the display as shown at right:

＿

’

…

•

V W

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

M N O

]

}

„

”

—

This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-

{

—

case letters: pressing

the display.

will produce an r (not an R) on

‹

›

‰

Chara. Clear

Enter

‘

˜ ™

– —

¦ §

—

To switch back for upper-case entries, press [Ch a r a .] and select “Upper case” by

using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

Ñ Ò

Å Æ

Ú Û

To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, use the one-touch keys.

We’ll show you how to use the CODE function to enter even more characters (see

next).

The legends in the black border indicate which key you press, and in which

order, to get a given character. For example, to get “@” character, you’d press

4, 0. (The blank areas, for example 2, 0, indicate spaces.)

Note: If you make a mistake, press [Clea r ] to erase to the left.

To change just one character in the name, move the cursor by cursor key.

Press [Clea r ] to erase the character. Then re-enter the character correctly.

1.15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

To enter each character, press the key combination listed on the chart.

Im p or ta n t: Remember, there are three ways to enter characters:

En ter

Numbers

Letters/characters

Letters/characters/numbers

Usin g

Numeric keypad

One-touch keys

CODE chart for key combinations

Note: If you want to erase characters, press [Clea r ] to erase to the left.

To change just one character in the name, move the cursor by cursor

key. Press [Clea r ] to erase the character. Then re-enter the character

correctly.

Press [En ter ] to save the name.

1.16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

EasyStart (Initial setting)

EasyStart software is already installed on your Muratec machine. It guides you

through the process of entering your machine’s settings.

Remember that the settings you make here can always be changed later.

Getting started

Determine the following before you go any further:

Th e typ e of d ia lin g your telephone system requires — Choose either tone or

pulse (rotary) dialing.

Clearing stored settings

Before using EasyStart, clear your machine’s built-in user data memory. This

Th e n a m e a n d fa x n u m ber you w a n t to a p p ea r on you r fa xes —

Every fax page you send arrives at the receiving machine with a single line of

text at the very top of the page. This text lists a name and a fax number,

which are called a Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI). The TTI cannot be longer

than 22 characters.

ensures the memory will hold only your settings.

Im p or ta n t: After you use EasyStart, do not clear the memory again unless an

authorized technician asks you to do so.

To clear the machine’s memory:

Entering initial settings

Im p or ta n t: If you press RESET during EasyStart, your machine returns to standby

mode (its normal condition). But it will keep the settings you saved by

pressing [En ter ] as described in these instructions.

User data clear

Check

Press MENU, *, 2. The LCD now asks if you want

to clear the memory.

Note: If you don’t want to clear the memory,

just press [Ca n cel].

Press F AX to change to Fax mode, if the machine is in Copy mode.

If you do want to clear the memory, press

[En ter ].

Cancel Enter

Press MENU, [Fa x Set], I, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the current calendar/clock setting, with a cursor appearing

under the first digit.

Language settings

English is the language your machine initially displays on the LCD and uses to print

reports. But you can set it to “speak” French or Spanish, too.

As you give the order for the machine to change languages, it “rolls” from English to

French to Spanish, and then back to English.

I.User Install

Enter current time.

2001 11/26 13:30

Use the numeric keypad to enter the correct

date and time, using a 24-hour format for the

time. For instance, to set 1:30 PM on November

26, 2001, press 2 0 0 1 1 1 2 6 1 3 3 0.

To make the change from one language to the next, press MENU, #.

Note: Your machine automatically inserts the

Enter

spaces and date-slash. All you have to

do is enter the digits.

To change a digit, press the cursor key to move the cursor. Then enter the cor-

rect digit.

1.17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

I.User Install

TTI 1

Press [En ter ] to save the clock setting and continue EasyStart.

Upper case

The LCD now asks you to enter the name you

want to appear at the top of faxes you send.

The name may be up to 22 characters in length.

＿

Muratec

TTI 1

TTI 2

TTI 3

I.User Install

Set Daylight saving

ON or OFF.

OFF

The LCD now asks if you want to set the calen-

dar/clock to automatically

recognize daylight saving time (DST).

Select TTI 1, 2 or 3 using the cursor key. Then

press [En ter ].

Chara. Clear

Enter

When the setting is On, your machine automati-

cally recognizes DST at 2 AM on the appropriate

switchover Sundays each year.

Use the one-touch keys to enter letters and

other non-numeric characters. Regarding entering characters, see page 1.15.

▲

▼

Enter

Note: If you make a mistake, press [Clea r ] to erase to the left.

To change just one character in the name, move the cursor by cursor

key. Press [Clea r ] to erase the character. Then re-enter the character

correctly.

When the setting is Off, no automatic change will occur.

Select On or Off using the cursor key.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting and continue.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

If you do want to set or change another TTI, go back to step 14.

If you do not want to set or change any other TTI, press [Exit].

I.User Install

Enter your fax number.

123-456-7890

The LCD now asks you to enter your fax number

as you want it to appear on other fax machines’

displays or printouts. The fax industry term for

this number is Subscriber ID.

＿

I.User Install

Use cursor to select

usual TTI.

1:Muratec

2:Muratec General dept.

3:Muratec Account dept.

The LCD now asks you to set the usual TTI.

Select the TTI you want to appear usually on

faxes you send using the cursor key.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax num-

ber. To insert a dash, as shown here, press [ – ].

Clear

Enter

The number may contain up to 20 characters (numbers and dashes).

Press [En ter ] to save the setting and continue.

Note: If you make a mistake, press [Clea r ] to erase to the left.

　　　▲　　　　　　　▼　　　　　Enter

To change just one number, move the cursor by cursor key. Press

[Clea r ] to erase the number. Then re-enter the fax number correctly.

Press [En ter ] to save the number and continue.

I.User Install

Use cursor to select

reception mode.

Fax Ready

Tel/Fax Ready

The LCD now asks you to set the reception

mode.

I.User Install

Use cursor to select

dialing type.

Tone

Pulse

The LCD now asks you to set the type of dialing

needed for the machine, either tone or pulse.

Select desired reception mode using the cursor Fax/Tel Ready

Ans/Fax Ready

Tel Ready

key. (This setting can always be changed. We’ll

discuss reception modes further on pages 3.7.)

Select the type of dialing using the cursor key.

　　　▲　　　　　　　▼　　　　　Enter

Press [En ter ] to save the setting. Your machine

will return to standby mode.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting and continue.

　　　▲　　　　　　　▼　　　　　Enter

Ea sySta r t is com p lete!

1.18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

How to set the document

Acceptable document size

The acceptable dimensions as follows:

How to set the document

Setting the documents in the Automatic Document Feeder

• In the Automatic Document Feeder(ADF)

• On the Flatbed Scanner(FBS) glass

Set your document fa ce u p into the docu-

ment feeder. Your machine’s ADF will hold

up to 50 sheets.

Note: The green arrow will appear on the

ADF cover when the document is

set.

Feed direction

Adjust the document guide to fit your

documents.

Note: If you want to set the different sized documents at a time, turn the Mix

Length feature on. (See page 2.18 for copy, or page 3.33 for fax transmis-

sion.)

Au tom a tic d ocu m en t feed er (ADF ) (width × length)

Maximum:

Minimum:

11.0″ × 17.0″

Setting the documents on the FBS glass

5.8″ × 5.0″

F la tbed sca n n er (F BS) gla ss (width × length)

Maximum: 11.0″ × 17.0″

Lift the platen cover fully.

Set your document fa ce d ow n

on the FBS glass. The document

should be aligned to the rear

Things n ot to put in your fax

To avoid paper jams and damage to your machine, d on ’t in ser t:

left corner.

Gently close the platen cover.

•

Folded, curled, torn, wrinkled or very thin pages

Documents with staples, glue, tape, paper clips or still-wet correction fluid

“Sticky notes” (or documents with “sticky notes” attached)

Cardboard, newspaper or fabric

Note: If you do not lift the platen

cover fully, the document size

will not be detected automatically.

Im p or ta n t: When copying a bound document, such as a book, the copied image

may contain some black areas. To reduce this effect, hold down the

document to prevent its bound part from rising. However, d o n ot

pr ess too str on gly. This may break the FBS glass and cause an injury.

Pages with duplicating carbon on either side

Credit cards or any small, thick items

1.19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic copy features

Some guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1

Basic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4

Reduce / Enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5

Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6

Using the bypass tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic copy

Some guidelines

Select document type

Automatic document size detection

You can select the two document types by pressing DOCUMENT.

Your machine can automatically detect the following size of your document and

select a suitable sized paper to copy your document.

PHOTO

– Select this mode when copying documents contain-

ing photographs or drawings with letters.

• Letter (8.5″ × 11″)

• Legal (8.5″ × 14″)

• Ledger (11″ × 17″)

• Half-letter (5.5″ × 8.5″)

PHOTO/TEXT – Select this mode when copying photographs or

drawings.

AUTO

– This mode automatically selects the suitable setting

according to the document type.

Note: Half-letter is available only with the FBS.

Note: If you want to make only the light areas, such as the text written with pen-

cil, darken selectively, assign DocEnhance to a Soft Key and turn it on.

(See page 4.1.)

If the suitable sized paper is not set in the paper cassette, the LCD shows:

Set

Copy Ready

Ppr. LTR

Note: You can change the document type priority. (See page 2.27.)

100%

If you want to copy with the paper the machine auto-

No paper size

is suitable.

matically selected, press START.

Copying with auto

selected paper.

Copy : START

Cancel : STOP

If you want to copy with other size paper, press STOP

to cancel this operation, then set the suitable paper in

the cassette and adjust the Reduce/Enlarge ratio.

Adjust image contrast

You can adjust the copy image contrast to match your document by pressing

CONTRAST.

Paper

Zoom

Sort

DARK

– Darkens weak, “washed-out” images.

– Provides some darkening of documents.

– Suited to most documents.

– Provides some lightening of documents.

– Lightens up overly dark documents.

If you set the non-standard sized document or the machine could not detect the doc-

ument size, the LCD shows:

NORMAL

Set

Copy Ready

Ppr. LTR

100%

If you want to copy with the paper that the machine

LIGHT

AUTO

Auto doc. size

detection failed. automatically selected, press START.

– This mode automatically sets the suitable setting

according to the document density.

Copy : START

Cancel : STOP

If you want to copy with other sized paper, press STOP

to cancel this operation, then set the suitable paper in

the cassette and adjust the Reduce/Enlarge ratio.

Note: You can change the image contrast priority. (See page 2.27.)

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Manual paper select

You can select the paper manually by pressing [Paper] or using the cursor key.

Note: If the optional multi-paper tray is attached, you can select the multi paper

tray, see “Using the bypass tray” on page 2.7.

2.1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic copy

When scanning the document using the FBS (Flatbed scanner)

Scanning the document

Note: The machine gives priority to the document on the ADF to make a copy or

send a fax, when the documents are set both on the ADF and FBS glass.

When scanning the document(s) using the ADF

Set your document on the FBS glass.

(See “How to set the document,” page 1.19.)

Set your document in the ADF (automatic document feeder).

(See “How to set the document,” page 1.19.)

Set any setting you want.

Set

Ppr. LTR

100%

Press START.

Normally, the LCD will show (see right) and

start copying after scanning the document.

Ppr. LTR

100%

Press START.

Normally, the LCD will show (see right) and

start copying after scanning the document.

# of scan

PrintPage

# of scan

PrintPage

copies 1/ 5

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Paper

Zoom

Sort

However....

Set

Ppr. LTR

100%

When you set the sort, combine or duplex func-

tion, the LCD appears as shown right.

Ppr. LTR

100%

When you set the sort, combine, duplex or book-

let function, the LCD shows as shown right.

Next doc.: No

# of scan

PrintPage

Next doc.: No

# of scan

PrintPage

In this case, you can set different documents for

copying after finishing the current scanning.

In this case, you can set different document(s)

for copying after finish the currently scanning.

copies 1/ 5

Yes

Copy Ready

Set

Copy Ready

Set

100%

(1) After scanning the first page of your docu-

ment, remove the first page and then set the

next page of your document on the FBS glass

or ADF.

100%

If you want to scan a different document:

(1) Press [Yes] during the machine is scanning

Set next doc.

PrintPage

Set next doc.

PrintPage

the current document.

copies 1/ 5

(2) After scanning the first document(s), set

next document in the ADF or FBS and then

press [Sta r t]. The machine will start scan-

ning the next document(s).

Note: You can use the ADF to scan the next

document (see left column).

Start Exit

(2) Press [Sta r t]. The machine will start scanning the next page of your docu-

ment.

If you want to scan more document(s), repeat step (1)–(2).

If you want to scan more documents, repeat step (1)–(2).

Note: You can set the next document on the FBS glass to scan it (see right

(3) After scanning all pages of your document, press [En d ].

column).

The machine will start printing the scanned documents.

(3) After scanning all pages of your document, press [En d ].

The machine start printing the scanned documents.

2.2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic copy

Select paper

Reset the settings

Auto paper select

Auto reset

Set

During your operation, if any keys are not pressed within three minutes, the

machine reset the display to the initial screen and after more three minutes the

machine reset any key settings automatically.

Copy Ready

Ppr. Auto

The machine selects suitable sized paper automati-

cally based on the document size and the

reduce/enlarge ratio.

100%

Note: As default setting, the auto reset time is set three minutes. You can change

Note: Make sure that the “Auto” is selected. If not,

select “Auto” by pressing [Pa p er ] or using

cursor key.

this auto reset time. (See page 2.28.)

Manual reset

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Any time you press RESET, the machine resets the display to the initial screen and

press RESET again to return the machine to its initial condition.

Rotate copy

When the document is set at a different direction from the recording paper in the

paper cassette with auto paper select mode on, the machine automatically rotate

the scanned image by 90° to match the recording paper direction. However, this

applies to the 8.5″ × 11″

size paper only.

Note: Rotate copy is not available with the following functions:

• Combine copy

• Repeat copy

• Directional Magnification copy

• Copying from multi-paper tray

• Copying with non standard sized paper

Interrupt

You can make copies during a multi-copy run.

Press INTERRUP T. The interrupt key will light on.

Replace the document with new document for interrupt copying.

Make your copies.

After interrupt copying, press INTERRUP T again. The interrupt key will light

off.

Reset the previous document by following the message on the LCD and press

[Sta r t].

The remaining number of copies of the previous multi-copy run will be made

automatically.

2.3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic copy

Basic procedure

Make sure the machine is in the Copy mode. To change to the Copy mode,

press COP Y.

Press RESET to clear the previous setting, if necessary.

Set your document on ADF or FBS glass.

Note: See “How to set the document” on page 1.19 for details.

Set any settings you want.

If you want to make only one copy of each page of the document, skip to step

7. Otherwise, proceed to step 6.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired number of copies for each page

in your document. You can set up to 99 copies.

Note: To change the number entered, overwrite it with new number.

Press START to begin the copying process.

Note: To stop the machine during multi-copying, press STOP

Note: To return the machine to the initial condition after copying, press RESET.

Note: By default, your machine make a copy with the following conditions:

Document type: Auto

Image contrast: Auto

Paper selection: Auto

Reduce/Enlarge ratio: 100%

Note: If you do not operate the machine for a certain period after copying, the

machine returns to the initial display and after a certain period, it resets

the any setting to the default. This is called “Auto Reset”. You can change

the auto reset time. (See page 2.28.)

2.4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic copy

Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad.

Reduce / Enlarge

Press START.

Zoom Copy

Auto Reduce/Enlarge

Your machine can select an appropriate reduction/enlargement ratio based on the

paper and document sizes you select.

You can enter the reduction/enlargement ratio from 25% through 400% in 1% steps.

Note: Enlargement is available only with FBS glass.

Note: Be sure to set the document in the same direction as the selected paper.

Note: If your machine could not detect the document size, it will make a copy with

100% ratio.

To copy with auto Reduce/Enlarge:

Set your document.

Note: You can select a preset ratio, and then adjust the ratio with the cursor key.

Note: If you want to enlarge, set the document on FBS glass.

Or, directly enter the ratio by numeric keypad.

Press REDUCE/ENLARGE to select “Au to”.

The all of reduce/enlarge LED lights.

To copy with reduction/enlargement in 1% steps:

Set your document.

Press [Pa p er ] and select the paper size using the cursor key.

Note: If you want to enlarge, set the document on FBS glass.

Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad.

Press START.

Set

Copy Ready

Ppr. Auto

100%

Press [Zoom ].

Reduce/Enlarge with a preset rate

You can copy with a preset ratio of reduction/enlargement. If you set a preset ratio,

your machine will select an appropriate paper automatically.

Enter the desired ratio using the

the cursor key or the numeric keypad.

and

Use cursor or

numeric keypad

to enter ratio.

Press START.

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Note: According to the ratio you selected, a part of the image might be lacked.

To copy with a preset rate of reduction/enlargement:

Set your document.

Note: If you want to enlarge, set the document on FBS glass.

Press [Pa p er ] and select the paper size using the cursor key.

Note: If you want your machine to select an appropriate paper automati-

cally, select “Au to”.

Press REDUCE/ENLARGE to select the desired ratio.

2.5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic copy

Set your documents, and then press START.

Sorting

When setting your document on the FBS glass:

Your fax machine can sort copies in sequential order.

1. Place the first page of your documents and then press START.

The machine scans the first page.

Non-Sort

Sort

Note: When making 1-sided copies, the first set will print.

2. Set the next page and then press START.

Note: Set the document in the same direction as step 1.

3. After the all pages of your document are scanned, press [Exit].

Shift Non-Sort ^{(Optional shift tray is required)}

Shift Sort (Optional shift tray is required)

When setting your documents in the ADF:

1. Set your documents and then press START.

Note: When making 1-sided copies, the first set of copies comes out first.

2. When the machine is finished scanning, the copies will be printed.

Note: You can make up to 99 copies at a time.

Note: The output tray can hold the following number of sheets.

Paper tray: 250 sheets

Optional 2-Bin tray (Upper): 100 sheets

Optional 2-Bin tray (Lower): 250 sheets

If the number of sheets exceeds the capacity, remove the sheets.

Note: You cannot copy from multi-paper tray with this feature.

Note: As a default, the non-sort is selected, You can change the default setting.

(See page 2.27.)

To copy with sorting:

Sort

Use cursor to select.

Press [Sor t].

Non sort

Sort

S-Non Sort

Shift Sort

Note: “Shift Sort” and “Shift Non-Sort”

appears when your fax machine has the

optional shift tray.

Select the sorting mode you want using the cur-

sor key, and then press [En ter ].

Enter

Enter the number of copies using numeric keypad.

2.6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic copy

Select the paper size.

Using the bypass tray

Paper Size Select

Select paper size

in bypass tray.

When using the standard paper size:

Letter

H.LTR

Legal

11x17

If you want to copy onto the transparency film, thick paper, envelopes or post cards,

use the bypass tray.

(1) Select the paper size using the cursor key.

(2) Press [En ter ].

Note: Also, your machine’s multi-purpose cassette (1st cassette) can hold these

papers.

Ppr.Type Other

Enter

When using the non standard paper size:

Note: You can set the paper in the bypass tray with a length of 3.6″ to 11.7″ (91 to

Paper Size Select

297 mm) and width of 5.5″ to 17″ (140 to 432 mm).

Select paper size

in bypass tray.

(1) Press [Oth er ].

Im p or ta n t: If loading transparency (OHP) film, be sure that the film does not

have paper backing and/or a leading strip. If it does, remove the paper

backing and/or strip before inserting.

(2) Select the paper size using the cursor key.

(3) Press [En ter ].

Postcard

Set the document in the ADF or on the FBS.

Ppr.Type Standard Enter

Open the bypass tray.

When using the special sized paper:

Place a sheet of paper face down on the

bypass tray. Then align the paper guides

to the sheet’s edges and insert the sheet

until it comes to a stop.

Paper Size Select

Select paper size

in bypass tray.

(1) Press [Oth er ].

Monarch

Custom1

Custom2

Custom3

(2) Select “Cu stom ” using the cursor key.

Note: You can register three types of special

Note: You can place only one sheet on

size as you want.

the bypass tray at a time.

COM10

(3) Press [En ter ].

Ppr.Type Standard Enter

Press [P p r.Size].

Paper Size Select

Move cursor and enter

value.

If you’re using the standard type of paper (plain paper), skip to step 7.

Otherwise, proceed to step 5.

Paper Size Select

(4) Enter the horizontal and vertical size of the

paper using the numeric keypad.

Paper range

10.0"

Note: You can also enter the paper size using

Set paper type.

Press [P p r.Typ e].

H. (5.5-17.0)

V. (3.6-11.7)

14.0"

and

of the cursor key.

Plain

PasteBoard

OHP

Env./Post

Note: To change Horizontal/Vertical, use

Select the paper type using the cursor key.

Then press [En ter ].

Enter

and

of the cursor key.

(5) Press [En ter ].

Enter

Press START to begin the copying process.

2.7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced copy features

Quick index for major functions (Copy mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9

Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10

Image Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11

Series Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13

Erase center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13

Erase border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14

TopUp Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14

Binding Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15

Directional magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15

Positive / Negative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16

Last copy job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17

Mixed length copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18

Duplexed copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19

Booklet copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced copy

Quick index for major functions (Copy mode)

Reduce / Enlarge

⇒ Page 2.5

Erase Center

⇒ Page 2.13

Reverse black and white area

⇒ Page 2.16

Sorting Copy

Erase Border

Last copy job

⇒ Page 2.6

⇒ Page 2.14

⇒ Page 2.17

Combine

⇒ Page 2.10

TopUp copy

⇒ Page 2.14

Mix length copy

⇒ Page 2.18

Image Repeat

⇒ Page 2.11

Binding Margin

⇒ Page 2.15

Duplex Copies

⇒ Page 2.19

Series Copies

⇒ Page 2.13

Directional Magnification

⇒ Page 2.15

Booklet Copies

⇒ Page 2.23

(Optional duplex unit required.)

Vertical %

Horizontal %

2.9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Copy

To copy with combining:

Combine

Press MENU.

Select “Com bin e” using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

You can copy 2, 4 or 8 pages of your documents into one sheet.

Note: The Auto Reduce/Enlarge is selected automatically.

2 pages --> 1 sheet

4 pages --> 1 sheet

Combine

Select # of document.

Ratio:Auto

Select the desired combination modes using the

cursor key.

# of doc

2 4 8

Paper

Letter

Note: The number of documents combined

can be 2, 4 or 8.

If you want to change the recording paper size

for combining, proceed to next step. Otherwise,

skip to step 6.

Paper

Cancel

Enter

8 pages --> 1 sheet

Press [Pa p er ] to select the paper size, and then press [En ter ].

You can insert the separator lines between combined images. If you want to

insert the separator lines, proceed to next step. Otherwise, skip to step 8.

Combine

Select # of document.

Ratio:Auto

Press NEXT and then press [Lin e] to print the

separator lines. To cancel the separator lines,

press [Lin e] again.

Note: If you select the 2 in 1 or 8 in 1, you should set your document with the dif-

ferent direction from the direction of recording paper you selected.

If you select the 4 in 1, you should set your document with the same direc-

tion from the direction of recording paper you selected.

# of doc

2 4 8

Paper

Letter

Note: The width of the line can be changed.

(See page 2.28.)

Layout Position

Line

Note: You can print a separator line between copied images.

If you want to arrange the position of the each

document, proceed to next step. Otherwise, skip to step 12.

Note: In this mode, the reduce/enlarge ratio will be set to “Auto” (automatically).

If you want to set the reduction/enlargement ratio manually, set the ratio

after setting the combine function.

Combine

Move cursor and enter

page # using num. key.

Press [Position ], the LCD will show:

Note: According to the size of document and recording paper you selected, a part

of the image might be lacked.

Note: If [Position ] does not appear on the

LCD, press NEXT.

Note: If the number of the documents you set was less than document pages you

selected for combining, the last page(s) will be copied blank.

Select the position using the cursor key and

enter the number of the document you want to

change using the numeric keypad.

Note: The machine cannot copy your documents different in size and direction.

Again

Enter

Make sure the document are set to same direction shown on the LCD.

Note: The number which was on the position you selected will change places

Note: You cannot use this function with the duplex function.

with the number you entered.

Note: If you want to reset to the initial position setting, press [Aga in ].

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

2.10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced copy

If you want to change the layout, proceed to next step. Otherwise, skip to step

16.

Image Repeat

Note: Use this function when you set the reduction/enlargement ratio by

yourself.

You can copy one document repeatedly 2, 4 or 8 times in one sheet.

Combine

Use cursor to select

layout.

2 repeats

4 repeats

Press [La you t], the LCD will show:

Note: If [La you t] is not appeared on the LCD,

Layout

Mode

press NEXT until it appears.

Mod1 Mod2

Select the layout using the cursor key.

Enter

Press [En ter ] to save the layout setting.

8 repeats

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Note: If [En ter ] is not appeared on the LCD, press NEXT.

Note: To cancel the setting of the combine function, press [Ca n cel].

Set

Copy Ready

Auto

The Combine icon will be displayed on the LCD.

Note: In this mode, the reduce/enlarge ratio will be set to “Auto” (automatically).

If you want to set the reduction/enlargement ratio manually, set the ratio

after setting the repeat function.

Combine

Setting complete

Note: According to the size of document and recording paper you selected, a part

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Set the documents.

of the image might be lacked.

Note: Set the documents as you see on the LCD in step 3.

Note: When this function is available, the rotate copy is not available. Be careful of

the setting direction of the document.

If you set your documents in the ADF:

Press START. After the all documents in the ADF are scanned, the copies will be

printed.

If you set your document on FBS glass:

Press START after set the first page of your documents on the FBS glass.

Then set the next page of your document, then press [Sta r t].

After all your documents are scanned, press [Exit].

2.11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Copy

To make copy with repeat:

Set

Copy Ready

Auto

Repeat

Use cursor to select.

Ratio:Auto

The Repeat icon will be displayed on the LCD.

Press MENU.

Repeat

Setting complete

Select “Rep ea t” using the cursor key, and then

press [En ter ].

# of Rep.

2 4 8

Paper

Letter

Note: The Auto Reduce/Enlarge is selected

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Set the documents.

automatically.

Paper

Cancel Enter

Note: Set the documents in the same direction as you see on the LCD in step

Select the desired repeat modes using the cur-

sor key.

If you set your documents in the ADF:

Press START. After all the documents in the ADF are scanned, the copies will be

printed.

Note: The number of documents repeated can be 2, 4 or 8.

If you want to change the recording paper size for combining, proceed to next

step. Otherwise, skip to step 6.

If you set your document on FBS glass:

Press [Pa p er ] to select the paper size, and then press [En ter ].

Press START after setting the first page of your documents on the FBS glass.

Then set the next page of your document, then press [Sta r t].

After all your documents are scanned, press [Exit].

You can insert the separator lines between repeated images. If you want to

insert the separator lines, proceed to next step. Otherwise, skip to step 8.

Repeat

Use cursor to select.

Ratio:Auto

Press NEXT and then press [Lin e] to print the

separator lines. To cancel the separator lines,

press [Lin e] again.

# of Rep.

2 4 8

Paper

Letter

Note: The width of the line can be changed.

(See page 2.28.)

Layout

Line

If you want to change the layout, proceed to next step. Otherwise, skip to step

12.

Note: Use this function, when you set the reduction/enlargement ratio by

yourself.

Repeat

Use cursor to select

layout.

Press [La you t], the LCD will show:

Note: If [La you t] does not appear on the LCD,

Layout

Mode

press NEXT until it appears.

Select the layout using the cursor key.

Mod1 Mod2

Enter

Press [En ter ] to save the layout setting.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Note: If [En ter ] does not appear on the LCD, press NEXT.

Note: To cancel the setting of the combine function, press CLEAR.

2.12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced copy

Series Copies

Erase center

You can make one-sided copies from two facing pages of book documents.

Your machine can make copies with erasing the shadow at the center of the record-

ing paper.

Note: Your machine has three types of erasing shadow function, Erase Center,

Note: In this mode, the reduce/enlarge ratio will be set to “Auto” (automatically).

If you want to set the reduction/enlargement ratio manually, set the ratio

after setting the series copies function.

Erase Border and TopUp Copy. You can use these functions at a time.

Note: The default setting of the erased margin is 0.1 inch. You can change the

default setting. (See page 2.26.)

Note: According to the size of document and recording paper you selected, a part

of the image might be lacked.

Erase Center

Move cursor and enter

Press MENU.

Note: This feature is available only with the FBS.

value.

(0.1-2.0)

Series Copy

Use cursor to select.

Ratio:Auto

Select “Er a se Cen ter ” using the cursor key,

and then press [En ter ].

Document

Press MENU.

0.1"

Select “Ser ies Cop y” using the cursor key, and

then press [En ter ].

Enter the center erased margin using the

numeric keypad or pressing the

cursor key.

Orig.bound

and

of the

Cancel

Enter

Paper

Letter

Select the bound side of the book document

using the cursor key.

If your book document type is read from left to

right, select “L”.

Note: You can specify the margin width as follows:

Paper

Cancel Enter

0.1″ to 2.0″ in 0.1″ steps.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

If your book document type is read from right to left, select “R”.

Set

Copy Ready

100%

If you want to change the recording paper size, proceed to next step.

Otherwise, skip to step 6.

The Erase center icon will be displayed on the

LCD.

Press [Pa p er ] to select the paper size, and then press [En ter ].

Erase Center

Setting complete

Set your documents, then press START.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Set

Copy Ready

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Auto

The Series copy icon will be displayed on the

LCD.

Set the documents on FBS glass and press

START.

Series Copy

Setting complete

Paper

Zoom

Sort

2.13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Copy

Erase border

TopUp Copy

Your machine can make copies with erasing the shadow at all four sides of the

recording paper.

Your machine can make copies with erasing the shadow of the outside of the docu-

ment. This feature is convenient when you make a copy keeping the top cover

opened and the document is smaller than the paper you want to copy, for example,

when you want to make a copy of half-letter sized document on letter-sized paper.

Note: Your machine has three types of erasing shadow function, Erase Center,

Erase Border and TopUp Copy. You can use these functions at one time.

Note: Your machine has three types of erasing shadow function, Erase Center,

Note: The default setting of the erased margin is 0.2 inches. You can change the

Erase Border and TopUp Copy. You can use these functions at a time.

default setting. (See page 2.25.)

Note: This feature is available only with the FBS.

Note: You cannot use this function with the Positive/Negative function.

TopUp Copy

Use cursor to select

scan size.

Erase Border

Move cursor and enter

Press MENU.

value.

(0.2-2.0)

Letter

H.LTR

Legal

Select “Top Up Cop y” using the cursor key,

and then press [En ter ].

Select “Er a se Bor d er ” using the cursor key,

and then press [En ter ].

Document

R&L

0.2"

T&B

0.2"

Select the document size you want.

Enter the upper/lower and left/right erased

margin using the numeric keypad or pressing

Cancel

Enter

Cancel Enter

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

the

and

of the cursor key.

Set

Copy Ready

Note: You can specify the margin width as follows:

Auto

The icon will be displayed on the LCD.

0.2″ to 2.0″ in 0.1″ steps.

Note: To change between upper/lower and left/right, press

of the

Set your document on the FBS, then press

START.

TopUp Copy

Setting complete

cursor key.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Set

Copy Ready

The Erase border icon will be displayed on the

LCD.

100%

Erase Border

Setting complete

Set your documents, then press START.

Paper

Zoom

Sort

2.14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced copy

Binding Margin

Directional magnification

You can make a binding margin on the copy by shifting the image to left, right,

upper or lower.

Directional ratio(%) magnification

You can copy with different magnification ratios horizontally and vertically.

Vertical %

Note: You can set the desired margin between 0.1 and 1.0 inch, however, if you set

the margin too large, a part of the image might be lacked.

Horizontal %

Note: You can enter the ratios from 25% through 400 % in 1% step.

With some ratios you entered, a part of the image might not be copied or

blank margins will appear on copies.

Note: The default setting of binding margin is 0.0 inch. You can change this

default setting. (See page 2.26.)

Press MENU.

Adjust the binding margin

Press MENU.

Select “D. Ma g.” using the cursor key and then press [En ter ].

Margin

Use cursor to set

bind margin. (0.1-1.0)

Top

0.0"

D.Mag.

Move cursor and enter

value.

Select “Ma r gin ” using the cursor key, and then

press [En ter ].

Enter the desired vertical ratio using

the cursor key or numeric keypad. Then, press

or of the cursor key.

(25-400)

Right

0.0"

D.Mag.%

To adjust the top and bottom margin (to move

the image upper or lower) by pressing pressing

100%

Bottm

0.0"

Left

0.0"

Enter the desired horizontal ratio using

of the cursor key or numeric keypad.

of the cursor key.

100%

Cancel Enter

To adjust the left/right margin (to move the

Mag.inch Cancel

Enter

Note: To change number you entered, press

image left or right) by pressing

of the cursor key.

of the cursor key, then enter new number.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Set

Copy Ready

Set

Copy Ready

100%

The Margin icon will be displayed on the LCD.

100%

The D.Mag. icon will be displayed on the LCD.

Set your documents, then press START.

Margin

Setting complete

Set your documents, then press START.

D.Mag.

Setting complete

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Paper

Zoom

Sort

2.15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Copy

Directional size (inch) magnification

The suitable magnification ratios will be automatically selected according to the

horizontal and vertical length of your document and copy image you entered.

Positive / Negative

When this feature is turned on, black and white areas of your document will be

reversed.

Note: You cannot use this function with the Erase border function.

Vertical

copy size

Vertical

original size

Horizontal original size

Horizontal copy size

Note: The range of size you can enter is 0.1 – 50.0 inches in 0.1 inch steps.

Note: If the calculated ratio is over than 400% or under than 25%, the ratio is set

Press MENU.

with 100% automatically.

Select “Nega /Posi” using the cursor key and then press [En ter ].

Press MENU.

Nega/Posi

Select “D.Ma g.” using the cursor key and then press [En ter ].

Press [En ter ] to turn this feature On.

Press [Ma g.in ch ].

Note: If you want to turn this feature Off,

D.Mag.

press [Ca n cel].

Move cursor and enter

value. (0.1-50.0)

Mag.inch V. ---% H. ---%

Enter the horizontal size of your document

using the

keypad. Then press

of the cursor key or numeric

of the cursor key.

Cancel

Enter

11.0"

22.0"

Enter the vertical size of your document using

Doc.

Ppr.

Set

Copy Ready

8.5"

0.1"

the

of the cursor key or numeric key-

of the cursor key.

100%

The Reverse icon will be displayed on the LCD.

pad. Then press

D.Mag.% Cancel Enter

Enter the horizontal size of the copy using the

Set your documents, then press START.

Nega/Posi

Setting complete

of the cursor key or numeric keypad. Then press

of the cursor key.

Enter the vertical size of the copy using the

numeric keypad.

of the cursor key or

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Note: To change number you entered, press

of the cursor key, then

enter new number.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting. The D.Mag. icon will be displayed on the

LCD.

Set your documents, then press START.

2.16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced copy

Erase the document for Last Job

Last copy job

Your machine can hold the scanned data when you make a copy for a certain period.

With this feature, you can make the same copy as the previous even when you do

not have the original document.

Press MENU.

Select “La st J ob” using the cursor key and then press [En ter ].

Set

Last Job

Enter number of copies

and press START.

002 pages

are stored in memory.

Press [Er a seDoc.].

Im p or ta n t: You must set the Last J ob hold time in advance. (See page 2.28.)

If you want to set this feature Off, set 0 minute in the Last J ob hold

time setting.

Note: The machine holds only the last copy job in the memory.

EraseDoc

Note: This feature will be not available in the following cases:

• When the power was turned off after making a copy

• When the Last J ob hold time you set has passed (see page 2.28.)

• When the scanned data was erased (see the right column)

Last Job

OK to erase?

The LCD will show:

# of stored page :002

Using Last Job feature

Press [Yes] to erase it.

Press MENU.

The machine will erase the document for the Last Job

in the memory.

Select “La st J ob” using the cursor key and then press [En ter ].

Yes

Set

Last Job

Enter number of copies

and press START.

002 pages

are stored in memory.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of

copies you want.

Note: To change the number entered, over-

write it with new number.

Press START.

EraseDoc

The machine will start to make copies.

2.17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Copy

To make a mixed length copy:

Mixed length copy

Set your documents face up into the ADF.

Adjust the document guide to fit the docu-

ments.

When you want to make a copy of the various sized documents, turn this feature on.

Making copies on the same sized paper as each documents:

Press MENU.

Select “Mix Len gth ” using the cursor key

and then press [En ter ].

Mix Length

Press [En ter ] to turn this feature On.

Note: If you want to turn this feature Off,

press [Ca n cel].

Reduce each document to fit the same sized paper:

Cancel

Enter

Set

Copy Ready

100%

The Mix Length icon will be displayed on the

LCD.

Mix Length

Setting complete

Select the recording paper and the reduction

ratio you want.

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Note: When your document is smaller than the paper you selected, it will be

If you want your machine to select the same sized paper as each document

automatically, press [Pa p er ] and select “Au to”. Then press REDUCE/ENLARGE

to select “100%”.

printed with 100% as the enlarged copy feature is not available with ADF.

If you want your machine to reduce each document to fit the paper you

selected automatically, press [Pa p er ] and select the desired paper. Then press

REDUCE/ENLARGE to select “Au to”.

Acceptable document size

Acceptable document size for the mixed length copy is as follows:

Half-letter , Letter , Legal

Press START.

Note: If your machine does not have suitable sized papers, the LCD will show

“No paper size is suitable. OK to continue coping?”. If you want to con-

tinue, press START and supply the papers the LCD shows. Otherwise,

press STOP and return to step 1.

Letter , Ledger

2.18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced copy

DuplexCopy

Use cursor to select

item.

2->1-sided

Duplexed copies

Select the bind position using the cursor key.

Select [R&L] when the document direction is

as illustrated below:

Bind

R&L Top

Your machine can scan 2-sided documents and make 1-sided copies.

When your machine has the optional duplex unit, you can also make 2-sided copies

from 1-sided documents, 2-sided documents or facing pages of book documents.

Doc.Type Cancel

Enter

Front side Back side

How to set the document

Set the documents as shown below:

Front side

Back side

Select [Top ] when the document direction is as illustrated below:

Making single copies from 2-sided documents

Front side Back side

Front side

Back side

Press MENU.

Note: If you want to change the document type, press [Doc.Typ e]. Your

Select “Du p lexCop y” using the cursor key and then press [En ter ].

machine will return to step 3.

If you do not have the optional duplex unit, skip to step 4.

Set

Copy Ready

100%

Press [En ter ] to save the setting. The Duplex

icon with Sort icon will be displayed on the LCD.

DuplexCopy

Use cursor to select

doc.type.

Select “2→1-sid ed ” using the cursor key and

then press [En ter ].

DuplexCopy

Setting complete

Set your documents, then press START.

1 2-sided

2 2-sided

2 1-sided

Book(Face)

Book(F&B)

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Enter

2.19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Copy

If you select [Top ], the copy result will be as illustrated below:

Making duplex copies from two 1-sided documents

Note: The optional duplex unit is required to use this feature.

Front side Back side

Front side

Back side

Press MENU.

Select “Du p lexCop y” using the cursor key and then press [En ter ].

Note: If you want to change the document type, press [Doc.Typ e]. Your

DuplexCopy

Use cursor to select

doc.type.

machine will return to step 3.

Select “1→2-sid ed ” using the cursor key and

Set

Copy Ready

then press [En ter ].

100%

1 2-sided

2 2-sided

2 1-sided

Book(Face)

Book(F&B)

Press [En ter ] to save the setting. The Duplex

icon with Sort icon will be displayed on the LCD.

DuplexCopy

Setting complete

Set your documents, then press START.

Enter

Paper

Zoom

Sort

DuplexCopy

Use cursor to select

item.

1->2-sided

Select the bind position using the cursor key.

If you select [R&L], the copy result will be as

illustrated below:

Bind

R&L Top

Doc.Type Cancel Enter

Front side Back side

Front side

Back side

2.20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced copy

Making duplex copies from 2-sided documents

Note: The optional duplex unit is required to use this feature.

Making duplex copies from facing pages of the book

When you want to make duplex copies from facing pages of the book, you can choose

the document type from the following two types.

Note: The optional duplex unit is required to use this feature.

Two facing pages --> One 2-sided sheet

DuplexCopy

Use cursor to select.

Ratio:Auto

When you select “Book (Fa ce)”, two facing pages of

your original documents will be copied onto one 2-

Press MENU.

Facing

sided sheet. When page 1 and page 2 are facing, page

Bind

Select “Du p lexCop y” using the cursor key and then press [En ter ].

1 will be copied onto the face and page 2 will be onto

the back, as follows:

Paper

Letter

DuplexCopy

Use cursor to select

doc.type.

Select “2→2-sid ed ” using the cursor key and

Doc.Type Cancel

Enter

then press [En ter ].

1 2-sided

2 2-sided

2 1-sided

Book(Face)

Book(F&B)

If the booklet copy feature is also set to On,

proceed to step 5.

Otherwise, skip to step 6.

Enter

Same as original book

DuplexCopy

Use cursor to select

item.

2->2-sided

Select the bind position using the cursor key.

DuplexCopy

Use cursor to select.

Ratio:Auto

When you select “Book (F &B)”, page 1 will be copied

onto the back of the first sheet. Then page 2 will be

copied onto the face of the second sheet and page 3

will be onto the back of the second sheet, as follows:

Note: Regarding [R&L] and [Top ], refer to

step 4 in “Making duplex copies from

two 1-sided documents” on page 2.19.

Bind

R&L Top

Book(F&B)

Bind

Paper

Letter

Note: If you want to change the document

type, press [Doc.Typ e]. Your machine

will return to step 3.

Doc.Type Cancel Enter

Doc.Type Cancel

Enter

Set

Copy Ready

100%

Press [En ter ] to save the setting. The Duplex

icon with Sort icon will be displayed on the LCD.

DuplexCopy

Setting complete

Set your documents, then press START.

Note: The face of the first sheet will be blank.

Paper

Zoom

Sort

2.21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Copy

Making two facing pages into one 2-sided sheet

Making duplex copies the same as the original book

Press MENU.

Select “Du p lexCop y” using the cursor key and then press [En ter ].

DuplexCopy

Use cursor to select

doc.type.

DuplexCopy

Use cursor to select

doc.type.

Select “Book (Fa ce)” using the cursor key and

then press [En ter ].

Select “Book (F &B)” using the cursor key and

then press [En ter ].

1 2-sided

2 2-sided

2 1-sided

Book(Face)

Book(F&B)

1 2-sided

2 2-sided

2 1-sided

Book(Face)

Book(F&B)

Enter

DuplexCopy

Use cursor to select.

Ratio:Auto

DuplexCopy

Use cursor to select.

Ratio:Auto

Select the bound side of the book document

using the cursor key.

Select the bound side of the book document

using the cursor key.

Facing

Book(F&B)

Bind

If your book document type is reading from left

to right, select “L”.

If your book document type is reading from left

to right, select “L”.

Paper

Letter

Paper

Letter

If your book document type is reading from

right to left, select “R”.

If your book document type is reading from

right to left, select “R”.

Doc.Type Cancel Enter

Doc.Type Cancel

Enter

Note: If you want to change the document

type, press [Doc.Typ e]. Your machine

will return to step 3.

Note: If you want to change the document

type, press [Doc.Typ e]. Your machine

will return to step 3.

Set

Copy Ready

Auto

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

The Duplex icon with Sort and Combine icon

will be displayed on the LCD.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

The Duplex icon with Sort and Combine icon

will be displayed on the LCD.

DuplexCopy

Setting complete

DuplexCopy

Setting complete

Paper

Set your book document on the FBS glass, then press START.

Zoom

Sort

Paper

Set your book document on the FBS glass, then press START.

Zoom

Sort

2.22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced copy

Set

Copy Ready

Auto

Booklet copies

Press [En ter ] to save the setting. The Booklet

icon with Duplex and Sort icon will be dis-

played on the LCD.

Booklet

Setting complete

Note: The optional duplex unit is required to use this feature.

Note: This feature is available only with the ADF.

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Making a booklet copy from eight 1-sided documents

Set your documents in the ADF, then press START.

Press MENU.

Select “Book let” using the cursor key and then press [En ter ].

Select the binding position – left, right or upper – using the cursor key.

If you want to select the binding position to left or right:

Booklet

Use cursor to select.

Ratio:Auto

(1) Select recording paper except direction of

the paper by pressing [Pa p er ] and then

press [En ter ].

Bind Posi.

L R T

Paper

Letter

(2) Select binding position to left or right using

the cursor key.

If you want to make a booklet copy reading

Paper

Cancel Enter

from left to right, select “L”.

If you want to make a booklet copy reading from right to left, select “R”.

If you want to select the binding position to upper:

Booklet

Use cursor to select.

Ratio:Auto

(1) Select direction of the recording paper by

pressing [Pa p er ] and then press [En ter ].

Bind Posi.

L R T

Paper

Letter

(2) Select binding position to upper. (Select

“T”on the LCD.)

Paper

Cancel Enter

2.23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the default copy settings

Erase border setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25

Erasing center setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26

Binding margin setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26

Sorting copy setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27

User settings (for copy mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27

Print the copy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copy settings

Accessing the default copy setting mode

You can change or set the machine’s default copy settings.

A. Erase border setting

Defa u lt settin g: OFF, Erased margin: Left and Right 0.2″, Top and Bottom 0.2″

Note: Regarding the changing of the fax settings, see pages 3.69–3.76.

Note: Regarding the changing of the machine settings, see pages 4.6–4.16.

The default setting of the erased margins in the erase border function can be

changed within 0.2 – 2.0 inches in 0.1 inch steps.

Erase Border Setting

Use cursor to select

item.

Erase Border: OFF

To access the copy settings:

Press MENU, [Cop y Set].

Press MENU.

Select “A.Er a se Bor d er Settin g” and then

press [En ter ].

Default

: T & B 0.2"

R & L 0.2"

Press [Cop y Set].

Exit

Enter

Copy Settings

Use cursor to select

item.

A.Erase Border Setting

B.Erase Center Setting

C.Margin Setting

D.Sort Setting

Erase Border Setting

Use cursor to select

item.

OFF

To change the default setting of Erase Border,

select “Er a se Bor d er ” then press [En ter ].

Select “ON” or “OF F ” then press [En ter ] to

save the setting.

E.User Settings

Enter

Erase Border Setting

Move cursor and enter

If you want to change the default value of

erased margin, select “Defa u lt” then press

[En ter ].

Select the desired settings using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

value.

(0.2-2.0)

Change the settings to your preference.

Document

R&L

0.2"

T&B

0.2"

Enter desired value, then press [En ter ].

Then, press [Exit] to save the setting.

Default

Enter

Press [Exit] or RESET to save the default set-

ting.

Note: Press RESET to return to standby.

Note: If you set the default setting to ON, the Erase Border icon will be appeared

on the LCD.

2.25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copy settings

B. Erasing center setting

Defa u lt settin g: OFF, Erased margin: 0.1 inch

C. Binding margin setting

Defa u lt settin g: OFF, Binding margins: 0 inch

The default setting of the erased margins in the erase center function can be

changed within 0.1 – 2.0 inches in 0.1 inch steps.

The default setting of the binding space in the image shift copy function can be

changed within 0.1 – 1.0 inch in 0.1 inch steps.

Erase Center Setting

Use cursor to select

item.

Erase Center: OFF

Margin Setting

Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, [Cop y Set].

Margin

Default

: OFF

: Left

Select “B.Er a se Cen ter settin g” and then

press [En ter ].

Select “C.Ma r gin Settin g” and then press

[En ter ].

Default

: Center 0.1"

0.0"

Right 0.0"

Top 0.0"

Bottom 0.0"

Enter

Exit

Enter

Exit

Erase Center Setting

Use cursor to select

item.

OFF

Margin Setting

Use cursor to select

item.

To change the default setting of Erase Center,

select “Er a se Cen ter ” then press [En ter ].

To change the default setting of the binding

margin, select “Ma r gin ” then press [En ter ].

OFF

Select “ON” or “OF F ” then press [En ter ] to

save the setting.

Select “ON” or “OF F ” then press [En ter ] to

save the setting.

Enter

Erase Center Setting

Move cursor and enter

Margin Setting

Use cursor to set

bind margin. (0.1-1.0)

If you want to change the default value of

erased margin, select “Defa u lt” then press

[En ter ].

If you want to change the default value of bind-

ing space, select “Defa u lt” then press [En ter ].

value.

(0.1-2.0)

Right

0.0"

Top

0.0"

Document

Enter desired value using the cursor key, then

press [En ter ].

Bottm

0.0"

0.1"

Left

0.0"

Enter desired value, then press [En ter ].

Default Enter

Default

Enter

Press [Exit] or RESET to save the default set-

ting.

Press [Exit] or RESET to save the default set-

ting.

Note: Press RESET to return to standby.

Note: If you set the default setting to ON, the Erase Center icon will be appeared

Note: If you set the default setting to ON, the Binding Margin icon will be

on the LCD.

appeared on the LCD.

2.26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copy settings

01. Copy scan setting

Defa u lt settin g: Document type: Auto, Image density: Auto

D. Sorting copy setting

Defa u lt settin g: Non-Sort

You can change the priority mode of Document type and Image density.

You can select sort function.

Copy Scan Setting

Use cursor to select

item.

Doc.type :Auto

Contrast :Auto

Press MENU, [Cop y Set].

Select “D.Sor t Settin g” and then press [En ter ].

Select “E. User Settin gs” and then press

[En ter ].

Sort Setting

Use cursor to select

item.

Non sort

Sort

Select desired function for default sort setting.

Select “01. Cop y Sca n Settin g” and then

press [En ter ].

Press [En ter ] to save the default setting.

Exit

Enter

Note: Press RESET to return to standby.

Copy Scan Setting

Use cursor to select

item.

Auto

Text & Photo

Photo

Note: If you set the sort function to ON, the Sort

If you want to change the priority mode of docu-

ment type, select “Doc. typ e” and then press

[En ter ].

Enter

icon will appear on the LCD.

Select desired mode and then press [En ter ] to

save the setting.

E. User settings (for copy mode)

You can change the default of following settings:

Enter

Scan settings. (Document type priority and Image density priority)

Width of the separator line in combine or image repeat function.

Auto reset time.

Copy Scan Setting

Use cursor to select

item.

Light

If you want to change the priority mode of

image density, select “Con tr a st” and then

press [En ter ].

Normal

Dark

・－－・－－・－－・－－・

Scanning resolution priority. (You can select 600 dpi or 400 dpi)

Select desired mode using the cursor key, and

then press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Auto

To access the machine setting mode:

Enter

Press [Exit] or RESET to save the default set-

ting.

Press MENU, [Cop y Set].

Select “E. User Settin gs” and then press [En ter ].

Note: Press RESET to return to standby.

User Settings

Use cursor to select

item.

Select desired setting you want to change, then

press [En ter ].

01.Copy Scan Setting

02.Separator Line Width

03.Copy Panel Reset

04.Last Job Hold Time

05.Image Compress Mode

Change the settings to your preference.

Enter

2.27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copy settings

02. Width of the separator line

Defa u lt settin g: 0.01 inch

Copy Panel Reset

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

Select “Reset a fter sca n ” and then press

[En ter ].

You can change the width of the separator line in the Combine and Repeat function.

Select “ON” or “OF F ” then press [En ter ] to

save the setting.

The default setting is 0.01 inch, but you can change it to within 0.01 – 0.05 inch in

0.01 inch steps.

Enter

Press MENU, [Cop y Set].

Press [Exit] to finish.

Press RESET to return to standby.

Select “E. User Settin gs” and then press [En ter ].

Select “02. Sep a r a tor Lin e Wid th ” and then press [En ter ].

04. Last Job Hold Time

Defa u lt settin g: 0 minute

Separator Line Width

Set width of line.

0.01"

Line width

(0.01-0.05)

:0.01"

Enter the width of the separator line you want

to set to default.

Your machine can hold the last scanned data of copying for a certain period. You can

change that time here.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Note: If it is 0 minute, the Last Job feature will not work.

Press RESET to return to standby.

Enter

Press MENU, [Cop y Set].

Select “E. User Settin gs” and then press [En ter ].

03. Auto reset mode

Defa u lt settin g: Auto reset time: 3 minutes, Reset after scan: OFF

User Settings

Use cursor to select

item.

01.Copy Scan Setting

02.Separator Line Width

03.Copy Panel Reset

Select “04. La st J ob Hold Tim e” and then

press [En ter ].

The machine returns to its initial condition automatically after a certain period of

time. You can change this time from 1 to 10 minutes. Also, you can set the machine

to return to its initial condition soon after finishing to scan.

04.Last Job Hold Time

05.Image Compress Mode

Note: The machine first resets the LCD display, and after certain period of time it

Enter

resets the key settings to the initial condition.

Press MENU, [Cop y Set].

Last Job Hold Time

Enter the hold time.

0 min.

(000-600)

Enter the time for holding the scanned data for

the Last Job feature.

Select “E. User Settin gs” and then press [En ter ].

Select “03. Cop y Pa n el Reset” and then press [En ter ].

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Copy Panel Reset

Set auto reset time.

After 3 min. (1-10)

Auto reset time : 3min.

Reset after scan : OFF

Press RESET to return to standby.

Enter

Select “Au to r eset tim e” and then press

[En ter ].

Enter the time for auto resetting, and then

press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Exit

Enter

2.28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copy settings

05. Image Compression Mode

06. Cassette for copying

Defa u lt settin g: NORM

Defa u lt settin g: 1st cassette: ON, 2nd cassette: ON

You can compress the scanned image and store it in memory. When you select HIGH

If you do not want to use certain cassette for copying, set it to OFF.

in this setting, you can store more documents in the memory.

Press MENU, [Cop y Set].

Note: When you select HIGH, the scanning speed will be slower.

Select “E. User Settin gs” and then press [En ter ].

Press MENU, [Cop y Set].

User Settings

Select “E. User Settin gs” and then press [En ter ].

Use cursor to select

item.

06.Cassette for Copy

Select “06. Ca ssette for Cop y” and then press

[En ter ].

User Settings

Use cursor to select

item.

01.Copy Scan Setting

02.Separator Line Width

03.Copy Panel Reset

Select “05. Im a ge Com p r ess Mod e” and then

press [En ter ].

Enter

04.CopyAgain Hold Time

05.Image Compress Mode

Enter

06.Cassette for Copy

1st Cassette

2nd Cassette

Use cursor to select

cassette.

Select the cassette you want to set using the

cursor key and then press [En ter ].

:ON

05.Image Compress Mode

Use cursor to select

item.

Select the mode you want.

If you want to store more documents in the

memory, select HIGH.

NORM: make copies faster

HIGH: fit more in memory

If you want to make the scanned speed to be

faster, select NORM.

Exit

Enter

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Enter

06.Cassette for Copy

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

Select “ON” or “OFF” using the cursor key.

Press RESET to return to standby.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

If you want to set other cassette, repeat step

4–6.

Enter

To finish, press [Exit].

Press RESET to return to the standby mode.

2.29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copy settings

F. Print the copy settings

You can print the list of copy settings. In the list, the current setting is shaded.

To print the copy setting list:

Press MENU, [Cop y Set].

Select “F. P r in t Cop y Settin gs” using the cursor key.

Press [En ter ].

2.30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copy settings

This page intentionally blank.

2.31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic fax features

Some guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1

Sending a fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3

Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8

Using as a Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic fax

Some guidelines

Mixing resolution and contrast in a multiple page

When you send the document with more than one page, you can select different res-

olutions and contrasts for each page.

Resolution, grayscale and contrast

Reviewing resolution and grayscale:

Place your document, select resolution and contrast for first page, dial and press

START. Then follow one of the following two procedures.

•

Nor m a l resolution is suitable for most typed documents and simple drawings.

•

Fin e resolution is ideal for maps, moderately complicated drawings, floorplans or

handwritten documents.

When the document is placed in the ADF

•

Su per fin e resolution (“S-FINE” on the control panel) reproduces the detail of

extremely complicated drawings or line art.

Select resolution and contrast before the next page is scanned.

Gr a ysca le mode (“HALFTONE” on the control panel; “Gray” on the LCD) captures

shades in photos and drawings.

When the document is placed on the FBS glass

Remove the previous page and place the next page.

Note: If you send a fax in superfine, certain fax models (especially older, non-

Muratec models) receive it only in fine mode. However, you can send a fax in

grayscale mode to virtually any fax machine currently in use.

Select resolution and contrast. Then press START.

To change the resolution setting, press RESOLUTION repeatedly.

A glowing LED indicates the machine is using the setting named by

that LED.

Entering a pause character when dialing

Some long-distance systems require dialing pauses, and pauses can also be useful

when you’re dialing through special telephone exchanges.

When you are dialing or storing the autodialer, and you want to insert a pause char-

acter, press NEXT until the [Pa u se] is appeared on lower part of the LCD, then press

[Pa u se] after you’ve dialed at least one other character. -/(the pause character)

will appear on the LCD.

Reviewing contrast:

Setting the contrast allows you to compensate for any excessive lightness or dark-

ness, as the case may be, of document pages you are sending or copying.

Each pause entered lasts for a factory-set two seconds.

Pressing CONTRAST to select the contrast mode:

For example, if the pause is at the factory setting, pressing 9, NEXT, [Pa u se],

19725552009 dials 9 [2-second pause] 1 9 7 2 5 5 5 2 0 0 9.

DARK

–

Darkens weak, “washed-out” images.

Provides some darkening of documents.

Suited to most documents.

Note: Each pause uses two of the characters you’re allowed in a number.

Note: To change the dialing pause length, see “Changing the pause length” on

NORMAL

page 3.75.

Provides some lightening of documents.

Lightens up overly dark documents.

LIGHT

AUTO

This mode automatically set the suitable setting

according to the document density.

Note: You can set the primary mode of the resolution and contrast. (See page

3.69.)

3.1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic fax

TTI select

Select scanning size to be sent

When you send or store your document, usually the machine automatically detects

the size of your document when it is placed on the ADF or FBS glass. However, if you

wish to override this and select scanning size manually, proceed to the following

steps.

When you send a fax message, your TTI is automatically printed at the top of docu-

ments you send. You can select one of three TTI you’ve stored in your machine.

Note: See “EasyStart” on pages 1.17–1.18, to refer the storing the TTI.

To select the TTI:

Note: You can select one of the following standard paper sizes.

•Letter(8.5″ × 11″)

Place the document and select resolution and contrast you require.

•Half-letter(5.5″ × 8.5″)

•Legal(8.5″ × 14″)

TTI

Use cursor to select

TTI.

1:AABBCC

2:BBCCDD

3:CCDDEE

•Ledger(11″ × 17″)

Press NEXT until [TTI] is appeared on the LCD.

* : Half-letter is available only with the FBS.

Press [TTI].

Note: If you want to set the different sized documents at a time in ADF, turn the

Mix Length feature on. (See page 3.33.)

Using a cursor key to select TTI you want to

send.

Note: To override auto document size detection, you have to set the scanning size

Enter

at each page scanning.

Press [Enter].

To select the scanning size manually:

Dial a fax number.

Place the document and select resolution and contrast you require.

Press START.

Enter NEXT, [ScanSize].

Scan Size

Note: After transmission if you did not select TTI before sending a document, the

stored TTI you’ve selected in EasyStart will be printed at the top of docu-

ment you send.

Use cursor to select

scanning width.

Select desired size by using a cursor key.

Auto

H.LTR

Letter

H.LTR

Note: When you use the ADF, “H.LTR” will be

11x17

Legal

Letter

shaded and cannot be selected.

Press [Enter].

Automatic document size detection

Your machine can automatically detect the following size of your document.

• Letter (8.5″ × 11″)

• Legal (8.5″ × 14″)

• Ledger (11″ × 17″)

• Half-letter (5.5″ × 8.5″)

Enter

Enter the fax number and press START.

Note: Half-letter is available only with the FBS.

If you set the non-standard sized document or the machine could not detect the doc-

ument size, select the scanning size manually. (See the right column.)

3.2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic fax

Sending a fax

Using memory transmission

Your fax machine has a great memory! Take advantage of it, and you could:

Sending a fax from the ADF

Adjust the document guides to fit the

page(s) you’ll be faxing. Your fax

machine’s ADF will hold up to 50

sheets.

Sa ve Tim e. By using your fax machine’s memory, you won’t have to wait for your

machine while it completes the transmission. Simply scan your document into your

fax machine’s memory, and you can walk away with your original in hand.

Sa ve Mon ey. If you’re transmitting to another memory-equipped fax machine, your

machine will send the document directly into the other machine’s memory and hang

up. (The receiving machine then prints out your message from its memory after the

call has ended.) This cuts your actual on-line time to a minimum.

Align the edge of your documents and

stack them in the ADF fa ce u p .

Adjust resolution and contrast if nec-

essary.

Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.

Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.

Sa ve Even Mor e Mon ey. Set up a delayed command (see page 3.25) to send your

document after hours, and you can save more money, because the line charges will

be cheaper.

The default transmission mode when the machine is turned on or when modes are

cleared is memory transmission. You can change this setting, see below.

Adjust memory transmission if necessary.

Press MEMORY TRANSMISSION to toggle memory transmission on and off.

Note: Whether you decide to send your documents from memory or manually, you

can override that choice one transmission at a time by pressing

MEMORY TRANSMIT before you send your document. After completing the

communication, your fax will return to the default setting.

Enter the fax number.

Enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone call.

(Example: Enter 9 to “dial out” from an office telephone system, or 1 for long-

distance.)

Note: If you want to change the default setting of transmission mode, see “Memory

Press START.

transmission,” on page 3.70.

By pressing START, you’ve just given your machine a command. In turn, your

machine gives this action a command number as it scans the fax document.

Note: Some documents use up memory faster than others. They include

documents with many pages and those with many dark areas. When the

machine’s memory is full, it can only transmit through the document feeder.

Scanning(Cancel:PressSTOP)

Jul 4 2000

Fax Ready

Com.No. :C001

12345678

13:30

Mem. 99%

P01

Letter

Normal

NextDoc.

Note: When you send a fax using the FBS glass, the memory transmission will be

This command number appears on the LCD

while the machine is scanning the document:

used automatically, even if the memory transmission is not set.

You’ll need to know this command number if

you later wish to cancel the transmission or to

print a stored document (see pages 3.29–3.30).

If the MEMORY TRANSMIT light glows, memory transmission is on.

If the MEMORY TRANSMIT light doesn’t glow, memory transmission is off.

Yes

3.3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic fax

Sending a fax from the FBS glass

Set your document that cannot be placed in the ADF on the FBS glass one page at a

time.

Now, everything is up to the machines — yours and the one you’re dialing.

•

If the fax has been set for Quick Memory transmit, your machine scans the

first page of your document into memory, then dials the other fax. When it

makes contact, your machine transmits the stored document from memory

while at the same time scanning the remaining pages of your document

into memory. (To set Quick Memory transmission, see page 3.70.)

Note: The machine gives priority to the document on the ADF to make a copy or

send a fax, when the documents are set both on the ADF and FBS glass.

•

If the fax has been set for the normal memory transmit, your fax scans the

entire document into memory, then dials the other fax. When it makes con-

tact, your machine transmits the entire stored document from memory.

If there’s a document in the

ADF, remove it.

Open the platen cover.

If the fax is set for non-memory transmission, your machine simply dials

the other fax. When it makes contact, your machine feeds the document

through, scanning and transmitting it as it goes.

Place the document fa ce

d ow n on the FBS glass and

Note: The more “stuff” (called black coverage) your machine “sees” on a

page, the slower the page feeds through as the fax scans it. And even

if the page is relatively clean, sending it in grayscale mode or at cer-

tain resolutions makes your machine “see” more “stuff.”

align it with the document

scale on the rear and left, then gently close the platen cover.

Make sure the document is set beyond the rear left corner.

Im p or ta n t: Gently close the platen cover so that you don’t catch your

The same is true if you set the contrast to Dark.

hands, possibly injuring them.

Im p or ta n t: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the docu-

Im p or ta n t: When sending a bound document, such as a book, the received

image may contain some black areas. To reduce this effect, hold

down the document to prevent its bound part from rising.

However, d o n ot pr ess too str on gly. This may break the FBS

glass and cause an injury.

ment, press the STOP key.

If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the J ob

Review function. See “Canceling commands” on page 3.6.

After transmission, the machine beeps and return to its standby mode.

Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.

Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.

Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.

Note: If the call fails, see “Redialing,” page 3.6.

Enter the fax number.

Also, enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone

call. (Example: Enter 9 to “dial out” from an office telephone system, or 1 for

long-distance.)

Press START.

By pressing START, you’ve just given your machine a command. In turn, your

machine gives this action a command number as it scans the fax document.

Scanning(Cancel:PressSTOP)

Jul 4 2000

Fax Ready

Com.No. :C001

12345678

13:30

Mem. 99%

P01

Letter

Normal

NextDoc.

Yes

This command number appears on the LCD

while the machine is scanning the document

into the memory.

You’ll need this command number to cancel the

transmission or to print a stored document (see

pages 3.29–3.30).

Yes

3.4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic fax

Sending a fax using monitor/call or a handset

You may also fax a document using either the monitor speaker or the optional hand-

set to dial.

If you want to send more pages, proceed to step 8.

Otherwise, press START to start the transmission, and skip to step 9.

Place the next page, then press [Sta r t] to start scanning.

To send any more pages, repeat this step.

Otherwise, press [Exit] to start the transmission, and skip to step 9.

Place the document in the ADF.

Note: In this function, you cannot use the FBS glass.

Now, everything is up to the machines — yours and the one you’re dialing.

When it makes contact, your machine transmits the stored document from

memory.

Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.

Tel Mode

Enter phone number

Obtain a dial tone, either by:

12345678

Note: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the document,

press the STOP key.

•

Pressing MONITOR/CALL

… or …

If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the J ob Review

function. See “Canceling commands” on page 3.6.

•

Lifting the optional handset.

In either case, the LCD shows (see right):

After transmission, the machine beeps and return to its standby mode.

Redial

Hold

Tone

Enter the fax number.

Also, enter access codes with the number, just as for a regular phone call.

Note: If the call fails, see “Redialing,” page 3.6.

When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.

Note: If a person answers the phone, use the optional handset to tell the

person you’re trying to send a fax. When you hear fax tones, press

START.

If you’re using an optional handset, hang up after pressing START.

After transmission, the machine beeps and returns to its standby mode.

Note: If the call fails and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press

MONITOR/CALL to hang up. Or if you’ve pressed START to begin the fax

transmission, press STOP to end it.

Also see “Redialing manually,” next page, if the call fails.

Overseas transmission mode

This mode instructs your fax to compensate for the poor transmission

characteristics of some overseas telephone lines. To set overseas mode:

Enter the fax number using the numeric keypad.

Transmission

Press START.

Press NEXT until the [Over sea s] is appeared.

Then press [Over sea s].

12345678

Note: This feature automatically deactivates itself

following each dialing.

Overseas

3.5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic fax

To redial a fax call manually with the monitor speaker or an optional handset:

Redialing

Make sure the document is in the ADF and that the resolution and contrast

are set.

If your fax call fails, your machine automatically redials it. In the Auto Redial mode,

your fax automatically redials the number every minute until one of the following hap-

pens:

Press MONITOR/CALL or lift the optional handset to get a dial tone.

•

It reaches the remote fax machine.

Press [Red ia l].

It has attempted the two redials and has still not connected.

While in the Auto Redial mode, the machine can continue to receive faxes and can

make as many as 100 fax transmissions.

When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.

Note: If a person answers the phone, use the optional handset to tell that

Note: If you used either the speaker or a handset to dial, you must redial manu-

person you’re sending a fax. When you hear fax tones, press START.

ally (see below).

To redial a voice call manually using the optional handset:

Note: The default setting of redial attempts is as flowing:

Number of redials : 2 times

Lift the optional handset to get a dial tone.

Redial interval : 1 minute.

You can change this setting as you want. See “Changing redial settings,”

page 3.75.

Press [Red ia l]. When the other person answers, use the optional handset to

speak to that person.

If the last redial attempt fails:

Canceling Commands

The Job Review function gives you the power to check on each job (or command) in

your machine’s memory. It also lets you cancel a command if you decide not to send

the document.

The LCD will ask you if it should attempt the redials again:

If you want the machine to attempt it again,

All redials failed.

press [Yes].

To cancel a command:

987-6543

Try again?

Otherwise, press [No]. Your machine will print

and display error messages.

Press J OB REVIEW

COMM CANCEL.

Reserved Transmission

Use cursor to select

command.

Num. of redials :02

If your machine is attempting to perform a

command now, it will appear on the display.

Skip to step 5.

Yes

C001 15/21:30 L.A.Office

C002 15/21:40 Broadcast

B001 15/22:00 Batch Tx

C003 17/08:00 987-6543

C004 17/08:10 N.Y.Office

Otherwise, proceed to step 3.

Redialing manually

You can always redial calls manually. And you must redial manually if you use

either the monitor speaker or an optional handset to dial the failed call.

Select “Reser ved Tr a n sm ission ” and then

press [En ter ]. The list of Reserved Transmission

will appear.

PrintDoc Location Erase

To redial a fax call manually without using the monitor speaker or an optional

handset:

Select the command you want to cancel using the cursor key.

Press [Er a se].

Make sure the document is in the ADF and that the resolution and contrast

are set.

To return your machine to standby mode, press RESET.

Press [Red ia l], START.

For more information on the Job Review function, see page 3.29.

3.6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic fax

Receiving faxes

Answering calls manually

In any reception mode, you can always answer calls manually if you have an

optional handset installed. Just pick it up, as you would if using a normal phone.

Reception modes

Your fax machine has five different reception modes — Tel Ready, Fax Ready,

Fax/ Tel Ready, Tel/ Fax Ready and Ans/ Fax Ready. (See below for details.)

Note: To change the reception mode, refer to the “EasyStart,” on page 1.18.

Note: If you assign Auto Rx into a Soft Key, you can toggle Manual reception (Tel

If you hear someone speaking to you, use your

optional handset to speak back.

Ready) and Auto reception easily. (See page 4.1)

Tel Ready mode

Use it if:

• You want to use the same line for both fax and phone calls

and

If you hear fax tones (“beep — beep — beep”),

press START and hang up the optional handset.

The fax machine will begin receiving a fax.

• On that line, you’re using at least one other phone which is not

connected to your fax machine

Note: Receiving this way disables “V.34” mode

so that the machine receives the fax in

normal ITU-T Group 3 fashion. (See

page AI.2.)

• You have an optional handset installed on your fax machine

In th is m od e: Your fax machine never answers calls automatically. You must

answer each call as described in “Answering calls manually” (this

page, left column).

Note: Don’t try to answer a call by pressing MONITOR/CALL. The monitor function

is for dialing only.

Fax Ready mode

Use it if:

Your fax machine uses its own phone line and doesn’t share it with a

phone or an answering machine.

Answering fax calls using another phone, not the fax machine

If you have one phone line ringing to several phones in your office and you have an

optional handset attached to your fax, there’s no need to run to the fax machine to

answer every call. If you happen to answer a fax call while you’re at another

extension, put the handset down, but don’t hang up. Walk to the fax machine and

pick up the optional handset. Then press START.

In th is m od e: Your fax machine answers each call and attempts to receive a fax.

After you press START, hang up both the fax machine’s handset and the second

telephone’s handset. Because remote fax machines will wait several seconds to hear

reception tones from your unit, you have about 30 seconds to walk to your fax, pick

up the handset, and press START.

3.7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic fax

Fax/Tel Ready mode

Using an answering machine with your fax machine

The Fax/Tel Ready mode is a combination of the Fax Ready and Tel Ready modes.

To connect your answering machine to your fax machine:

Use it if:

An optional handset is installed on your fax machine

and

You’re using the machine as both a fax machine and a telephone

Set the fax machine for Ans/Fax Ready.

Set your answering machine to answer calls after no more than two rings.

(See the answering machine’s instructions if necessary.)

In th is m od e: Your fax machine answers each call without ringing. If you receive a

voice call, it alerts you with a special ring.

Create a new outgoing message on your answering machine.

Here’s a suggested message:

Your fax machine receives faxes silently but also alerts you when a regular voice

call comes in. (Your fax machine also beeps once at the end of each reception.)

Hello! You’ve reached [your name or telephone number]. To leave a voice

message, please wait for the beep. To send a fa x, press START on your fax

machine. Thanks for calling!

If a voice call comes in, your fax machine detects it and sounds a special ring. If you

hear it, answer using your optional handset.

Im p or ta n t: Your answering machine’s outgoing message must be no longer

Note: This Fax/Tel Ready mode won’t turn off ringers on other telephones in your

than 10 seconds.

house or office. Other phones won’t distinguish between fax and voice calls.

Tel/Fax Ready mode

The Tel/Fax Ready mode is a combination of the Tel Ready and Fax Ready modes.

Out-of-paper reception

In the following cases, your machine cannot print fax messages but receive them

into its memory.

Use it if:

An optional handset is installed on your fax machine

and

You’re using the machine as both a telephone and a fax machine

•

When your fax machine runs out of paper.

When it does not have standard sized papers (Letter

, Legal , Ledger or

In th is m od e: Your fax machine rings the number of times you’ve identified in the

user settings. If you don’t use the optional handset to answer the

call, your fax machine answers the call. If a caller sends a fax, your

machine begins receiving it. If a voice call comes in, your machine

detects it and sounds a special ring, telling you to answer using the

optional handset.

Half-letter

) which can be used for the fax reception.

•

When the cassette is set to OFF for “Cassette for Rx” (refer to page 3.8).

Your machine can store up to 250 fax receptions in its memory. This is called out-of-

paper reception. Once you supply the papers, the fax machine prints the stored

messages automatically.

Note: The number of pages (not receptions) your fax machine can store for

Ans/Fax Ready mode

out-of-paper reception will vary. It depends on:

Use it if:

You’re using an answering machine that’s connected directly to your

fax machine.

•

Your machine’s memory capacity

Types of documents being sent to your machine

Resolution of documents being sent to your machine

In th is m od e: An answering machine connected to your fax machine answers each

call. If a voice call comes in, the answering machine begins to record

the incoming message. If your fax machine hears a fax tone, it

begins receiving the fax message.

3.8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic fax

Using as a Phone

Your machine can also be used as a phone, if you have an optional handset installed.

The following is a brief look at the machine’s telephone features.

Hold

You can put a call on hold during a conversation by pressing [Hold ].

At this point, you can either hang up the handset or leave it off the hook.

To return to your conversation:

Redial

• If you hung up the handset, pick it up.

Press [Red ia l] to redial the last number dialed on your machine.

• If you did not hang up the handset, press [Hold ] again.

Note: While holding your conversation, your machine beeps at one minute interval

to alert you are holding conversation. If you hold the conversation more

than five minutes, the machine will disconnect the call automatically.

Dialing with the monitor speaker

Because your machine has a monitor speaker, you can dial without picking up the

handset. For hands-free dialing:

Changing the dialing type

Tel mode

Enter phone number.

If, with your machine set for “Pulse” dialing, you must enter tones (“DTMF”) during a

call, press [Ton e] (the “-!” symbol will be shown on the LCD). Your machine now will

“tone” dial all subsequent numbers.

Press MONITOR/CALL. You’ll hear a dial tone

(unless you have set your speaker volume to

Off; see page 3.76), and you’ll see the display as

＿

shown at right:

Note: Using this key enables tone transmission from the numeric keypad after the

call is connected. When you hang up the call, your machine will return to

“pulse” dialing for the next call.

Dial the number you want. Use either the

numeric keypad, a one-touch key or a speed-

dial number to dial.

　Redial

Hold

Tone

Note: Remember, your machine’s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone. If a per-

Adjusting handset

son answers the call, pick up the handset to speak.

The small switches on the side of your machine’s handset adjust the ringer volume

and the receiver volume.

Note: If the call fails, press MONITOR/CALL to hang up.

Rin ger Volu m e Con tr ol — Adjust the

ringer volume to one of three settings:

High, Medium, or Low.

EasyDial directory dialing

The EasyDial directory feature is available for regular phone calls as well as fax calls.

Review the EasyDial instructions on page 3.22 for more information.

Ringer

Volume

Receiver Volu m e Con tr ol — If it is

hard to hear the remote person’s voice,

adjust the receiver volume to one of three

Receiver

Volume

Checking the fax reception mode

While using an optional handset for your call, if you press F AX, the LCD shows the

settings:

High, Medium, or Low.

current fax reception mode. Press F AX again to return to the TEL mode.

3.9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax features

Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11

Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24

Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25

Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26

Job Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29

Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32

F-Code communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44

Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54

Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Autodialer

Your fax machine’s autodialer stores your most frequently called phone and fax

numbers for instant recall so you don’t have to remember them. It’s something like

an electronic phone book.

Special Dialing Characters

Your fax machine allows you to enter special dialing characters when programming

the autodialer. These characters include hyphens and dashes, which make phone

numbers easier to read, and special characters needed for international calls.

The chart below briefly describes each of these characters. It also tells you what

keys to press on your fax machine to store those characters in your autodialer:

Autodialer basics

How do you autodial?

There are two kinds of autodialer numbers. The difference between the two is how

you dial them:

Ch a r. Wh a t it d oes

Keystr ok e(s)

Makes long numbers easier to read.

Typ e

How to d ia l

Am ou n t stor ed

Press [ – ]

–

Doesn’t change fax machine operation.

One-touch

Press one of the keys, marked 01–78

on the right side of the control panel

(Has no effect in the United States.)

Press [2n d Ton e]

Press [1st Ton e]

Speed-dial

Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX followed by a

three-digit identifier, from 001 to 222

222

Tells your fax machine to pause until it

“hears” a dial tone.

Tota l a m ou n t of n u m ber s stor ed

300

Enters a pause. Each pause lasts two

seconds (or whatever length you set; see

page 3.75). Each pause uses two of the

characters you can store in one phone

number.

Autodialing fax and phone numbers

Your fax machine’s autodialer will hold more than just fax numbers. You can store

phone numbers, too.

Press [Pa u se]

–/

–!

This is because when you use the autodialer to dial a number, the fax checks to see

if there’s a document in its feeder. If there is, the machine dials as a fax machine.

If there isn’t, it dials as a phone.

If your fax machine is on a pulse (not

tone-dialing) line, switches from pulse-

dialing to tone (“DTMF”)-dialing. Use after

the actual phone number but before any

characters (such as a long-distance

carrier’s access code) which must be in

DTMF tone. Do not use on a tone line.

Press [Ton e]

Location IDs and the EasyDial directory

When you store numbers in your autodialer, you can give these numbers descriptive

names, such as “Chicago office” or “Billing department”. Your machine calls this

name a Location ID.

Your machine’s autodialer sorts these location IDs alphabetically. Using your

EasyDial directory, you can look up these numbers by their descriptive names, just

as if you were using a phone book.

We’ll explain how to store the numbers and location IDs in the next few pages.

The EasyDial directory is discussed in detail on page 3.22.

3.11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Entering a one-touch number

Using one-touch numbers

A.One-Touch Dial

Select one-touch. (01-78)

Your fax machine stores up to 78 one-touch numbers using the keys marked 01–78.

Press MENU, A, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the one-touch number list.

You can not only enter, change and erase one-touch numbers but also insert and

delete (delete and shift) them. Refer to the followings about the select function keys

you should use.

01:

02:

03:

04:

05:

Select the one-touch key in which you want to

store a number.

A.One-Touch Dial

Select one-touch. (01-78)

Note: You can select the one-touch key by

Detail

Erase

Enter

pressing that key on the control panel.

Press [En ter ].

01:New York Office

02:Los Angeles Office

03:Chicago Office

04:London Office

05:Paris Office

01:

Enter fax number.

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

Use the numeric keypad to enter the number

exactly as your machine should dial it, includ-

ing whatever access codes your phone system

requires. (You may want to review “Special dial-

ing characters,” page 3.11.) The number can be

up to 40 characters in length.

Detail Erase

Enter

Clear

Enter

Note: You must enter the fax number to pro-

gram the one-touch key.

Note: If you want to erase characters, press [Clea r ] to erase to the left.

If you want to change just one character in the number, move the cur-

sor to that character, and press [Clea r ] to erase it. Then re-enter the

character correctly.

When the number is as you want it, press [En ter ] to store it.

A.One-Touch Dial

Select one-touch. (01-78)

01:123-4567

Use cursor to select

item.

Location:

Next, the LCD now displays (see right):

You can also program the following three items:

01:New York Office

02:Los Angeles Office

03:Chicago Office

04:London Office

05:Paris Office

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

•

Loca tion ID — The destination name. If you

enter the name, you can use the EasyDial

directory dialing function (see page 3.22).

•

Alter n a tive n u m ber — After all redial

Exit

Enter

attempts to the regular number fail, your

Insert Delete

fax machine will dial this alternative number. If the alternative number

also fails, the fax alarm beeps to alert you to a problem.

Note: Your fax holds a maximum of 10 alternative numbers in all, that is,

only 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers can have the alternative

number. After you have entered the alternative numbers for 10

speed-dials or one-touch numbers, the machine will disable to enter

the alternative number.

3.12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

**************************************************************

Pressing an empty one-touch key from the standby mode, you can also enter a one-

touch number.

•

Gr ou p n u m ber — If you enter the group number, you can use the group

dial transmission function. (See “Using call group,” in page 3.21.)

Helpfu l Tip

Note: If you wish to omit these settings, skip to step 16.

01:123-4567

Enter One-Touch

Would you like to enter?

03:

Location I.D. Upper case

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

Press the empty one-touch key you want.

The LCD shows:

To enter the Location ID:

Select the “Loca tion ” and press [En ter ].

Note: If you do not want to enter the one-

Enter the Location ID. (Regarding how to enter

the character, see “Entering character” on page

1.15.) A number’s Location ID may be up to 24

characters in length.

touch number, press [No].

Press [Yes].

Yes

Chara. Clear

Enter

Follow steps 4–16 in “Entering a one-touch

number” on pages 3.12–3.13.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

01:123-4567

Enter alt. number.

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

Note: If you press an empty one-touch key during broadcast or some other opera-

tions, the same display will appear. If you press [No], the machine will

return to the previous display. If you press [Yes], you can enter a one-touch

number and the machine will return to the standby mode.

To enter the Alternative number:

Select the “Alt.No.” and press [En ter ].

Enter the alternative number using the

numeric keypad. The number can be up to 40

characters long.

You can also enter the fax number first and then select the one-touch key in which

you want to store the number.

Clear

Enter

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Enter the fax number.

01:123-4567

Enter group number. (0-32)

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

Enter One-Touch

Would you like to enter?

03:987-6543

To enter the Group number:

Select the “Gr ou p No.” and press [En ter ].

Press the empty one-touch key you want.

The LCD shows:

Use the numeric keypad to enter the call

groups for this number.

There are 32 possible call groups, numbered

1–32.

Note: If you do not want to enter the one-

touch number, press [No].

Add

Clear

Enter

Press [Yes].

Yes

If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a comma

after each number (except the last one) by pressing [Ad d ].

Follow steps 4–16 in “Entering a one-touch

number” on pages 3.12–3.13.

Note: To assign this number to all 32 call groups, enter 0 (zero).

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

*****************************************************************************

Press [Exit].

If you do want to enter another one-touch number, go back to step 2.

If you do not want to enter any more one-touch numbers, press RESET to fin-

ish.

Use the autodialer labels in your fax’s packaging to write down the stored

numbers for easy reference.

If you have entered the group number, you can also print out a directory of

your call groups. (See page 3.22.)

3.13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Helpfu l Tip

Changing a one-touch number

**************************************************************

Pressing the one-touch key you want to change for a few seconds from the standby

mode, you can also change the one-touch number.

A.One-Touch Dial

Select one-touch. (01-78)

Press MENU, A, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the one-touch number list.

A.One-Touch Dial

Select one-touch. (01-78)

01:New York Office

02:Los Angeles Office

03:Chicago Office

04:London Office

05:Paris Office

Keep pressing the one-touch key you want to

change until this LCD appears:

Select the one-touch key you want to change a

previously stored number.

01:New York Office

02:Los Angeles Office

03:Chicago Office

04:London Office

05:Paris Office

Note: Be careful not to press it too shortly.

Note: You can select the one-touch key by

The machine might perform a transmis-

sion.

Detail Erase

Enter

pressing that key on the control panel.

Note: You can press [Deta il] to see the number which has been pro-

Detail

Erase

Enter

Press [En ter ].

grammed in that one-touch key.

01:123-4567

Enter fax number.

Follow steps 4–7 in “Changing a one-touch number,” left column on this page.

Press [En ter ].

123-4567

Location:New York Office

Alt.No. :123-9876

GroupNo.:1

*****************************************************************************

The previously stored number will be shown on

the LCD. If you want to change this number,

press [Clea r ] to erase it and then enter

another number by using the numeric keypad.

The number can be up to 40 characters in

length.

Erasing a one-touch number

Press MENU, A, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the one-touch number list.

Clear

Enter

Select the one-touch key which you want to erase.

When the number is as you want it, press [En ter ] to store it.

Note: You can select the one-touch key by pressing that key on the control

panel.

01:123-4567

Use cursor to select

item.

Location:New York Office

Alt.No. :123-9876

GroupNo.:1

Note: You can press [Deta il] to see the number which has been pro-

If you want to change Location ID, Alternative

number or Group number, enter them as

described in steps 7–15 on page 3.13.

grammed in that one-touch key.

A.One-Touch Dial

OK to erase?

01:123-4567

Location:New York Office

Press [Er a se]. The LCD shows (see right):

Note: If you want to change the previously

entered one, press [Clea r ] to erase it.

Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without eras-

Alt.No. :123-9876

ing the one-touch number you’ve

GroupNo.:1

selected, press [Ca n cel]. The fax

will return to step 2.

Exit

Enter

Note: If you want to omit these settings,

go to step 7.

Press [Exit].

Cancel

Erase

Press [Er a se] to erase the number.

If you do want to change another one-touch number, go back to step 2.

If you do not want to change any more one-touch numbers, press RESET to fin-

To erase another one-touch number, repeat steps 2–4.

ish.

Or press RESET to return to standby mode.

Use the autodialer labels in your fax’s packaging to write down the stored

numbers for easy reference.

If you have entered the group number, you can also print out a directory of

your call groups. (See page 3.22.)

3.14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

I.D., Alternative number or Group number as described in

Inserting and deleting a one-touch number

You can insert a one-touch number without erasing any one-touch number already

stored. If you insert a one-touch number, other numbers will be shifted downward

automatically.

Enter Location

steps 7–15 on page 3.13.

Note: If you want to omit these settings, go to step 11.

Press [Exit].

Also, you can delete a one-touch number and shift other numbers upward automati-

cally.

Press RESET to finish.

To insert a one-touch number:

To delete a one-touch number:

Press MENU, A, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the one-touch number list.

Press MENU, A, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the one-touch number list.

A.One-Touch Dial

Select one-touch. (01-78)

Select the one-touch key in which you want to

enter new number.

A.One-Touch Dial

Select one-touch. (01-78)

01:New York Office

02:Los Angeles Office

03:Chicago Office

04:London Office

05:Paris Office

Select the one-touch key you want to delete.

Note: You can select the one-touch key by

01:New York Office

02:Los Angeles Office

03:Chicago Office

04:London Office

05:Paris Office

Note: You can select the one-touch key by

pressing that key on the control panel.

Press NEXT, [In ser t].

Note: You can press [Deta il] to see the num-

ber which has been programmed in that

one-touch key.

Insert Delete

Insert

Delete

A.One-Touch Dial

OK to insert?

Press NEXT, [Delete].

The machine will ask you if you want to insert

an empty one-touch number at that place.

02:Los Angeles Office

Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without

03:Chicago Office

01:New York Office

A.One-Touch Dial

OK to delete?

The machine will ask you if you want to delete

that one-touch number.

inserting an empty one-touch

number at the place you’ve

selected, press [No]. The

machine will return to step 2.

04:London Office

05:Paris Office

01:New York Office

02:Los Angeles Office

03:Chicago Office

04:London Office

05:Paris Office

Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without delet-

ing the one-touch number you’ve

selected, press [No]. The machine

will return to step 2.

Yes

Press [Yes].

Yes

A.One-Touch Dial

Select one-touch. (01-78)

Press [Yes].

The one-touch key you selected will be empty

and other numbers will be shifted downward.

A.One-Touch Dial

Select one-touch. (01-78)

01:New York Office

02:Los Angeles Office

03:Chicago Office

04:

The one-touch key you selected will be deleted

and other numbers will be shifted upward.

Press [En ter ].

01:New York Office

02:Los Angeles Office

03:Chicago Office

04:Paris Office

05:London Office

Press RESET to finish.

Detail Erase

Enter

05:Tokyo Office

01:

Enter fax number.

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

Detail

Erase

Enter

Enter the fax number as described in step 4 on

page 3.12.

When the number is as you want it, press

[En ter ] to store it.

Clear

Enter

3.15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Printing a list of one-touch numbers

Forgot which number is stored in which one-touch key? Just print a list of your one-

touch numbers. The list includes each key’s number, the Location ID (if any),

fax/telephone number and group number(s) you’ve stored in the key.

Using speed-dial numbers

Your fax machine can store up to 222 speed-dial numbers, designated by three-digit

identifier codes from 001 through 222.

You can not only enter, change and erase speed-dial numbers but also insert and

delete (delete and shift) them. Refer to the followings about the select function keys

you should use.

To print a list of one-touch numbers, press MENU, A, [List].

One-touch fax dialing

To dial a fax call using a one-touch number:

B.Speed Dial

Select speed-dial(001-222)

Place the document and select resolution and contrast you require.

001:New York Office

002:Los Angeles Office

003:Chicago Office

004:London Office

005:Paris Office

Toggle between transmission from the feeder or from memory if necessary, by

pressing MEMORY TRANSMIT.

Press the one-touch key in which you’ve stored the number.

Detail Erase

Enter

One-touch phone dialing

To dial a phone call using a one-touch number, you must have an optional handset

attached to your machine. (Contact your authorized Muratec dealer to order an

optional handset.)

To make the call:

Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:

•

Lift the handset

Press MONITOR/CALL to use the monitor speaker

B.Speed Dial

Select speed-dial(001-222)

Press the one-touch key in which you’ve stored the phone number.

Note: Remember that your fax machine’s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone.

If you dialed by using the monitor speaker, pick up the handset to speak to

the person that answers.

001:New York Office

002:Los Angeles Office

003:Chicago Office

004:London Office

005:Paris Office

Note: If the call fails, and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to

hang up.

Insert Delete

3.16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Entering a speed-dial number

001:123-4567

Use cursor to select

item.

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

Next, the LCD now displays (see right):

You can also program the following three items:

B.Speed Dial

Select speed-dial(001-222)

001

001:

002:

003:

004:

005:

Press MENU, B, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the speed-dial number list.

•

Loca tion ID (“Location” on the LCD) — The

destination name. If you enter the name, you

can use the EasyDial directory dialing func-

tion (see page 3.22).

Note: Pressing the SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX for a

few seconds from the standby mode, you

can also enter a speed-dial number.

Exit

Enter

•

Alter n a tive n u m ber — After all redial

Detail Erase

Enter

Select the speed-dial number in which you

want to store a number.

attempts to the regular number fail, your fax machine will dial this alter-

native number. If the alternative number also fails, the fax alarm beeps to

alert you of a problem.

Note: Your fax holds a maximum of 10 alternative numbers in all, that is,

only 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers can have the alternative

number. After you have entered the alternative numbers for 10

speed-dials or one-touch numbers, the machine will be disabled to

enter the alternative number.

Note: You can select the speed-dial number by directly entering that three-

digit identifier code. When entering the identifier code for speed-dial

numbers less than 100, you must enter leading zeroes to make three

digits. For example, 001-099.

Press [En ter ].

001:

Enter fax number.

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

•

Gr ou p n u m ber — If you enter the group number, you can use the group

dial transmission function. (See “Using call group,” page 3.21.)

Use the numeric keypad to enter the number

exactly as your machine should dial it, includ-

ing whatever access codes your phone system

Note: If you wish to omit these settings, go to step 16.

001:123-4567

requires. (You may want to review “Special dial-

ing characters,” page 3.11.) The number can be

up to 40 characters in length.

Location I.D.

Upper case

To enter the Location ID:

Select the “Loca tion ” and press [En ter ].

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

Clear

Enter

Note: You must enter the fax number to pro-

Enter the Location ID. (Regarding how to enter

the character, see “Entering character” on page

1.15.) A number’s Location ID may be up to 24

characters in length.

gram the speed-dial number.

Note: If want to erase characters, press [Clea r ] to erase to the left.

Chara.

Clear

Enter

If you want to change just one character in the number, move the cur-

sor to that character, and press [Clea r ] to erase it. Then re-enter the

character correctly.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

001:123-4567

Enter alt. number.

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

When the number is as you want it, press [En ter ] to store it.

To enter the Alternative number:

Select the “Alt.No” and press [En ter ].

Enter the alternative number using the

numeric keypad. The number can be up to 40

characters long.

Clear

Enter

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

3.17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Changing a speed-dial number

001:123-4567

Enter group number. (0-32)

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

To enter the Group number:

Select the “Gr ou p No.” and press [En ter ].

B.Speed Dial

Select speed-dial(001-222)

Press MENU, B, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the speed-dial number list.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the call

groups for this number.

There are 32 possible call groups, numbered

1–32.

001:New York Office

002:Los Angeles Office

003:Chicago Office

004:London Office

005:Paris Office

Select the speed-dial number you want to

change.

Add

Clear

Enter

Note: You can select the speed-dial number by

Detail

Erase

Enter

If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a comma

after each number (except the last one) by pressing [Ad d ].

directly entering that three-digit identi-

fier code. When entering the identifier code for speed-dial numbers

less than 100, you must enter leading zeroes to make three digits. For

example, 001-099.

Note: To assign this number to all 32 call groups, enter 0 (zero).

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Note: You can press [Deta il] to see the number which has been pro-

grammed in that speed-dial number.

Press [Exit].

001:123-4567

Enter fax number.

If you do want to enter another speed-dial number, go back to step 2.

If you do not want to enter any more speed-dial numbers, press RESET to fin-

ish.

Press [En ter ].

123-4567

Location:New York Office

Alt.No. :123-9876

GroupNo.:1

The previously stored number will be shown on

the LCD. If you want to change this number,

press [Clea r ] to erase it and then enter

another number by using the numeric keypad.

The number can be up to 40 characters in

length.

If you have entered the group number, you can also print out a directory of

your call groups. (See page 3.22.)

Note: If you enter an empty speed-dial number during broadcast or some other

operations, the machine will ask “OK to register?”. If you press [No], it will

return to the previous display. If you press [Yes], you can enter a speed-dial

number and the machine will return to the standby mode.

Clear

Enter

When the number is as you want it, press [En ter ] to store it.

001:123-4567

Use cursor to select

item.

Location:New York Office

Alt.No. :123-9876

GroupNo.:1

If you want to change Location ID, Alternative

number or Group number, enter them as

described in steps 7–15 on pages 3.17–3.18.

Note: If you want to change the previously

entered one, press [Clea r ] to erase it.

Exit

Enter

Note: If you want to omit these settings,

go to step 7.

Press [Exit].

If you do want to change another speed-dial number, go back to step 2.

If you do not want to change any more speed-dial numbers, press RESET to fin-

ish.

If you have entered the group number, you can also print out a directory of

your call groups.(See page 3.22.)

3.18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Erasing a speed-dial number

Inserting and deleting a speed-dial number

You can insert a speed-dial number without erasing any speed-dial number already

stored. If you insert a speed-dial number, other numbers will be shifted downward

automatically.

Press MENU, B, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the speed-dial number list.

Select the speed-dial number you want to erase.

Also, you can delete a speed-dial number and shift other numbers upward automati-

cally.

Note: You can select the speed-dial number by directly entering that three-

digit identifier code. When entering the identifier code for speed-dial

numbers less than 100, you must enter leading zeroes to make three

digits. For example, 001-099.

To insert a speed-dial number:

Press MENU, B, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the speed-dial number list.

Note: You can press [Deta il] to see the number which has been pro-

B.Speed Dial

Select speed-dial(001-222)

grammed in that speed-dial number.

Select the speed-dial number in which you

want to enter new number.

B.Speed Dial

OK to erase?

001:123-4567

Location:New York Office

001:New York Office

002:Los Angeles Office

003:Chicago Office

004:London Office

005:Paris Office

Press [Er a se]. The LCD shows:

Note: You can select the speed-dial number by

Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without eras-

directly entering that three-digit identi-

fier code. When entering the identifier

Alt.No. :456-7890

ing the speed-dial number you’ve

GroupNo.:1

selected, press [Ca n cel]. The fax

code for speed-dial numbers less than

Insert

Delete

will return to step 2.

100, you must enter leading zeroes to

make three digits. For example, 001-099.

Cancel Erase

Press [Er a se] to erase the number.

Press NEXT, [In ser t].

To erase another speed-dial number, repeat steps 2–4.

Or press RESET to return to standby mode.

B.Speed Dial

OK to insert?

The machine will ask you if you want to insert

an empty speed-dial number at that place.

001:New York Office

002:Los Angeles Office

003:Chicago Office

004:London Office

005:Paris Office

Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without

inserting an empty speed-dial

number at the place you’ve

selected, press [No]. The machine

will return to step 2.

Yes

Press [Yes].

B.Speed Dial

Select speed-dial(001-222)

The speed-dial number you selected will be

empty and other numbers will be shifted down-

ward.

001:New York Office

002:Los Angeles Office

003:Chicago Office

004:

Press [En ter ].

005:London Office

Detail

Erase

Enter

3.19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

001:

Enter fax number.

Location:

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:

B.Speed Dial

Select speed-dial(001-222)

Enter the fax number as described in step 4 on

page 3.17.

The speed-dial number you selected will be

deleted and other numbers will be shifted

upward.

001:New York Office

002:Los Angeles Office

003:Chicago Office

004:Paris Office

When the number is as you want it, press

[En ter ] to store it.

Press RESET to finish.

005:Tokyo Office

Enter Location I.D., Alternative number or

Group number as described in steps 7–15 on

pages 3.17–3.18.

Clear

Enter

Detail

Erase

Enter

Printing a list of speed-dial numbers

Note: If you want to omit these settings, go to step 11.

Press [Exit].

You can easily print a list of your speed-dial numbers. The list includes each number’s

three-digit identifier, the Location ID (if any), number and any group numbers

you’ve stored for that speed-dial number.

Press RESET to finish.

To print a list of speed-dial numbers, press MENU, B, [List].

To delete a speed-dial number:

Fax dialing via speed-dial

To dial a fax call using a speed-dial number:

Press MENU, B, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the speed-dial number list.

Place the document and select the resolution and contrast you require.

B.Speed Dial

Select speed-dial(001-222)

Select the speed-dial number you want to

delete.

Toggle between transmission from the feeder or from memory if necessary, by

pressing MEMORY TRANSMIT.

001:New York Office

002:Los Angeles Office

003:Chicago Office

004:London Office

005:Paris Office

Note: You can select the speed-dial number by

directly entering that three-digit identi-

fier code. When entering the identifier

code for speed-dial numbers less than

100, you must enter leading zeroes to

make three digits. For example, 001-099.

Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier for the speed-dial

number you want to dial.

Insert Delete

Note: If the location ID has been programmed, it is shown on the LCD.

Otherwise, the fax number is shown on the LCD.

Note: You can press [Deta il] to see the number which has been pro-

grammed in that speed-dial number.

Press START.

Press NEXT, [Delete].

B.Speed Dial

OK to delete?

The machine will ask you if you want to delete

that speed-dial number.

001:New York Office

002:Los Angeles Office

Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without delet-

003:Chicago Office

ing the speed-dial number you’ve

selected, press [No]. The machine

004:London Office

005:Paris Office

will return to step 2.

Yes

Press [Yes].

3.20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Phoning via speed-dial

To make a phone call using a speed-dial number, you must have an optional handset

attached to your machine. To make the call:

Using call group

If you frequently send the same fax message to more than one location, store the

group number into your autodialer. (If necessary, see “Using a one-touch dial” and

“Using speed-dialing”, in previous pages.)

Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:

After you store the group number, you can send the same fax to many different loca-

tions. For example, one call group may include all of your clients in one city, another

group may include all of your employees and another may include all your vendors.

•

Lift the handset

Press MONITOR/CALL to use the monitor speaker

Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX.

Your machine can:

•

Store as many as 300 numbers in up to 32 call groups

Store one number in as many as 32 different groups

Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier for the speed-dial

number you want to dial.

Note: Remember that your fax machine’s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone.

If you dialed using the monitor speaker, pick up the handset to speak to the

person that answers.

Send a fax via call group

Note: The group number dialing can be used only for memory transmission.

Note: If the call fails, and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to

Place the document and the select resolution and contrast you desire.

hang up.

Transmission

Press START.

G01

Press [Gr ou p ].

Use the numeric keypad to enter the group

number you want to use to send a fax.

Note: If you want to send a fax to several

Group

Clear

Broadcas

groups at a time, press [Br oa d ca s]

then repeat steps 2-3. You can also enter the other locations using

either a one-touch key, speed-dial number or numeric keypad.

Press START.

3.21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Printing a group directory

Your machine can also print a call group directory. This lists all your stored autodialer

numbers by Location ID and lists the groups to which these numbers belong.

EasyDial directory dialing

EasyDial directory dialing makes your autodialer even more like an electronic

phone book. EasyDial sorts and displays numbers alphabetically according to their

Location IDs, so you can find them and dial them easily.

The directory divides the call groups into four banks, 01–09 (the list shows 00), 10–19

(the list shows 10), 20–29 (the list shows 20) and 30–32 (the list shows 30). If you spec-

ify call group 0 (which puts the number in all call groups), the directory shows all

numbers (see below).

To dial using EasyDial:

For a fax call: Place the document and select resolution and contrast you

require.

For a regular phone call: Lift up the optional handset.

For example, the directory might show:

Make sure there’s no document on the ADF and FBS glass, then skip to step 3.

No. Location

If you want to toggle between transmission from memory and transmission

from the feeder, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.

S001And Sew I 2 4

S002KC Enterp

S003Katz Cat

01 Carson Co

02 Tex. Ofc. 1

7 0

Transmission

Select location

Tel Index Alphabet [ A ]

AABBCC

ABBCC

BBCCDD

FFGGAABBCC

123AABBCC

Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX twice.

The LCD shows the listing in your fax machine’s

EasyDial directory.

03 e.e.gummi 12345678901234567890123456789012

The EasyDial directory sorts entries alphabeti-

cally in the following order:

In this list, speed-dial number 001 (S001) is in call groups 2 and 4; speed-dial num-

ber 002 (S002) is in groups 7, 10 and 21; speed-dial number 003 (S003) is in groups

20 and 32; one-touch number 01 ( 01) is in groups 4, 10 and 14; one-touch number

02 ( 02) is in group 1; and one-touch number 03 ( 03) is in all groups, 1 to 32.

(1) by alphabet

Enter

(2) by number

(3) by symbol.

To print a call group directory, press MENU, H, [List].

Scroll through the listings to find the one you want by using the cursor key.

Note: To quickly search, press capital letter of Location I.D. using one-touch

key.

When the LCD shows the name (Location ID) you want to dial, press START.

•

If there is a document on the ADF or FBS glass, your machine will dial a fax

call.

•

If you have lift up optional handset, your machine will dial a regular

phone call.

3.22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

If an EasyDial call fails

If an EasyDial call fails, what happens next depends upon the kind of call it was.

If it was a fax call …

… Your fax machine automatically redials the number according to the redial inter-

val you’ve set (see page 3.75). It keeps trying until either of the following occurs:

•

It successfully reaches the other number

It has attempted the number of redials programmed and has still not connected

(see “Changing redial settings,” page 3.75).

If it was a regular phone call …

… You’ll have to redial manually:

Obtain a dial tone by eith er lifting the handset or pressing MONITOR/CALL.

Press [Red ia l].

Note: If the call fails and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to

hang up. Or if you’ve pressed START to begin the transmission, press STOP to

end it.

3.23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Broadcasting

Broadcasting basics

The fastest way to fax one document to many recipients is to broadcast it.

Delayed broadcasting

What if you want the broadcast to take place later? That’s the purpose of setting up

a delayed broadcast.

In an ordinary broadcast, you send the fax as you normally would, except you add

more fax numbers. You can enter up to 330 numbers:

Note: Delayed commands are discussed in detail later. You may want to read

“Delayed transmission” on page 3.25 before proceeding.

•

30 manually-dialed numbers AND

300 autodialer numbers OR 1 call group with all 300 autodialer numbers

Follow steps 1–4 of “Broadcasting basics” (left column).

You ca n br oa d ca st u sin g a n y fu n ction th a t r equ ir es a fa x n u m ber to be

en ter ed . That means you can send a delayed broadcast, program a polling broad-

cast and even broadcast to “hub” units for F-Code relay broadcast initiation. All of

these are explained in this chapter.

Press MENU.

Delayed Tx

Enter Trnsmit Time

04/14:20

Select “Dela yed Tx” using the cursor key.

Then press [En ter ]. The LCD shows current day

To send a broadcast fax:

and time.

Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments as you would for a

regular fax transmission.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the

month and time (in 24-hour format) when you

want the broadcast to occur.

Press [Br oa d ca s].

Clear

Enter

Transmission

Enter fax number.

When finished, press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Enter the first fax number, as usual. Use either

Fax Ready

Nov 26 2001

Fax Ready

Reserved

13:30

Memory 100%

a one-touch number, a speed-dial number, a call

group or a regular number dialed from the

numeric keypad.

Press START. Your machine will return to

standby mode, while showing this on the LCD:

This means your fax machine is “Reserved” for

the delayed broadcast you

just programmed, but it can still be used to

send and receive faxes if your broadcast docu-

ment is stored in memory.

To add more fax numbers, press [Br oadcas]

between each one. Then enter the number as

described in step 3. You can send to up to 330

numbers for a broadcast.

Group

Clear

Broadcas

Redial

Group

Broadcas

Note: If you enter characters by mistake, press [Clea r ] to erase them.

Note: If you want to erase the fax number you’ve already entered, press

of the cursor key to select it and press [Clea r ].

Making changes to broadcasts

If you need to make changes in a broadcast after setting it up, use the Job Review

function. See “Reviewing or cancelling parts of a broadcast,” page 3.29.

Press START. Your fax machine scans the document into memory and then

sends it to each number or call group you’ve entered.

3.24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Delayed transmission

Take advantage of lower evening and weekend long-distance rates with delayed

transmission. Your fax machine can store up to 100 delayed commands, each of

which you can program up to 31 days in advance.

When the date and time are entered, press [En ter ] to save the delayed trans-

mission. The LCD shows:

Im p or ta n t: If you program all 100 delayed transmission commands, no memory

transmission is possible until one or more of the commands is com-

pleted. (To review memory transmission, see pages 3.3 and 3.70.)

However, if all 100 delayed commands are programmed, you can always

transmit manually using monitor/speaker dialing or an optional hand-

set (see page 3.5).

Transmission

Enter fax number

04/14:20

Enter the fax number for the delayed transmis-

sion document. You can either press a one-touch

key, enter a speed-dial number or use the

numeric keypad to enter the fax number.

Note: If you want to erase characters, press

[Clea r ] to erase to the left.

Group

Clear

Broadcas

If you want to change just one character

Setting up a delayed transmission

in the number, move the cursor by using cursor key, and press [Clea r ]

to erase it. Then re-enter the number correctly.

Im p or ta n t: Your machine only remembers the day of the month that it’s supposed

to send a delayed transmission. It does not remember the month

itself. So if you want to send a transmission at 5:05 PM on J u n e 26,

don’t program the transmission sooner than 5:06 PM on Ma y 26.

Fax Ready

Nov 26 2001

Fax Ready

Reserved

13:30

Memory 100%

Press START. Your machine returns to standby

mode, while showing this on the LCD:

To set up a delayed transmission:

This means your fax machine is “Reserved” for

the delayed transmission you just programmed.

•

Place the document and make any necessary adjustments.

If you set the machine for memory transmis-

sion, it will scan the document into memory,

after which you can use the machine normally.

Redial

Group

Broadcas

Press MENU.

Delayed Tx

Enter Trnsmit Time

04/14:20

Select “Dela yed Tx” and press [En ter ].

•

If you set the machine for manual transmission, the machine can receive

faxes but can’t transmit until your delayed command has been performed.

The LCD shows the current day of the month,

followed by the current time (in 24-hour for-

mat).

Im p or ta n t: If you’ve stored too much information in your machine’s memory, a

“Memory Overflow” message may appear on the LCD. This appears

because (1) too many pages have been stored in the memory, or (2)

the pages that are stored have too much information on them for your

fax machine to remember.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the

month and the time when you want the fax to

send the delayed transmission.

Clear

Enter

If this message appears, press START to tell your fax to keep as many

pages in memory as possible, or press CANCEL to delete from memory

all pages stored during the current operation (but not previous opera-

tions).

To review or cancel delayed commands, see “Job Review” on page 3.29.

3.25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Batch transmission

Batch transmission allows you to store multiple documents in an electronic “basket”

throughout the day and then fax that entire basket to one location.

Press [En ter ] to save the number.

To do this, just tell the machine when and where the transmission should go. When

that date and time arrives, your machine will transmit each document in the batch

box to the remote fax machine. You can store up to 40 documents (each document

can include one page or many pages) into your machine’s five electronic batch boxes.

Next, instruct your fax to send from this batch box in one of the following

ways:

Enter Trnsmit Time

Op tion 1:

At a certain time on a certain day

of the month (For example: “Do

this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”) —

Use the numeric keypad to enter

the date and time (24-hour for-

mat) the machine should send the

documents from the batch box:

30/17:05

123-4567

Tx Time :

Creating or modifying a batch box

Before sending a batch transmission, you have to create batch boxes in your fax

machine. The steps below allow you to modify existing batch boxes.

Enter

To create or modify a batch box:

L.Batch Send

Enter Trnsmit Time

00/17:05

123-4567

Op tion 2:

At a certain time each day you

press the key (For example: “Do

this at 5:05 PM today.”) — Use the

numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 (00),

and then the time when the fax

should send the documents from

the batch box:

Use cursor to select

batch box.

Press MENU, L, [En ter ]. The LCD will show the

batch box list.

Tx Time :

Using the cursor key, select the batch box you

want to create or modify.

Enter

Document EraseBox SetBox

Note: To change a digit in the date or the time, move the cursor by using cur-

Enter fax number.

sor key. Then enter the correct number.

Press [Set Box]. The LCD will show (see right):

When the date and time are set, press [En ter ].

Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax num-

ber exactly as your machine should dial it,

including whatever access codes your phone

system requires. (You may want to review

“Special dialing characters,” page 3.11.) The

number can be up to 40 characters in length.

Location I.D. Upper case

123-4567

Tx Time :30/17:05

Tx Time :

The LCD now displays:

The machine now asks you to name this batch

box.

Clear

Enter

If you do not want to enter or change this batch

box’s name, skip to step 10.

Your display can show only 26 characters at a time. To view characters beyond

those 26, scroll the cursor by using the cursor key.

Chara.

Clear

Enter

Enter the name the same way you entered your

fax name during EasyStart.

A batch box’s name may be up to 24 characters in length.

Note: If you want to erase characters, press [Clea r ] to erase to the left.

If you want to change just one character in the number, move the cur-

sor by using cursor key, and press [Clea r ] to erase it. Then re-enter

the number correctly.

Press [En ter ] to save the batch box information.

To create or modify another batch box, repeat steps 2–10. To finish, press RESET.

3.26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Printing a list of batch boxes

You can easily print a list of your batch boxes. The list includes each box’s identifier

number, the Location ID, fax number and date/time the transmission should start.

Storing a document for batch transmission

Your fax machine can store up to 40 documents (each document can include one

page or many pages) in each batch box until the date and time you designate the

batch transmission to take place. Once the batch documents are transmitted, they

are automatically erased from the machine’s memory.

To print the list, press MENU, L, [Box List].

Note: For this operation to work, the batch box must exist on your fax machine.

Erasing an empty batch box

To store a document in a batch box for batch transmission:

Batch boxes must be empty to be erased. If a box has documents stored in it, then

you first have to erase those documents. (See “Erasing a document stored in a batch

box,” page 3.28.)

Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.

Batch Tx

Use cursor to select

batch box.

To erase an empty batch box:

Press MENU, select “Ba tch Tx” and then press

[En ter ]. The LCD shows the batch box name and

transmission time:

1:AABBCC

2:BBCCDD

3:FFGGHH

00/17:05

30/17:05

15/14:20

Press MENU, L, [En ter ].

Select the batch box you want to use.

Select the batch box you want to erase.

1:AABBCC

OK to erase?

Enter

Press [Er a seBox].

If the batch box is empty, the LCD shows (see

right):

123-4567

Tx Time :00/17:05

Batch Tx

Press [Enter] to start.

Press [En ter ]. The LCD shows (see right):

Your machine gives each document in a batch

box a file number, shown as 01 above. You will

need to know this file number should you later

wish to erase or print the stored document.

Each batch box holds up to 40 files (01-40).

Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without eras-

AABBCC

ing the batch box you’ve selected,

press [Ca n cel].

The machine will return to

step 2.

Tx Time :00/17:05

Box No. :01

File No.:00

Cancel EraseBox

Mix Size Dup.Scan Enter

Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing any batch box, press RESET.

If you want to scan the duplexed documents,

proceed to step 5.

The machine returns to standby mode.

If you want to scan the mixed size documents, skip to step 7.

Otherwise, skip to step 8.

Batch Tx

Press [Er a seBox] to erase the batch box.

To erase another batch box, repeat steps 2–4. To finish, press RESET.

Use cursor to select

bind position.

Right&Left

Top

Press [Du p .Sca n ]. The LCD will show:

Select the binding position of your documents.

Then press [En ter ]. The duplex icon will

appear. Skip to step 8.

Cancel

Enter

Press [Mix Size]. The Mix size icon will appear.

Press [En ter ] to start scanning.

When finishing to scan, “Reserved” will be displayed on the top line of the LCD.

This means the document is stored in memory.

3.27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Printing a list of documents stored in batch boxes

You can print a list of the documents stored in your machine’s batch boxes. This list

provides you with the documents’ file numbers so you can erase or print them as

needed.

To print the list, press MENU, L, [Doc.List].

Printing a document stored in a batch box

To print a document stored in a batch box:

Press MENU, L, [En ter ].

Select the batch box storing the document you want to print.

Press [Docu m en t].

Select the document’s file number (01–40).

Press [P r in tDoc]. Your fax machine prints the document, then returns to

standby mode.

Erasing a document stored in a batch box

To erase a document stored in a batch box:

Press MENU, L, [En ter ].

Select the batch box storing the document you want to erase.

Press [Docu m en t].

Select the document’s file number (01–40).

Press [Er a seDoc] twice. The fax machine erases the document you’ve chosen,

then returns to standby mode.

3.28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Job Review

Your machine can store many “jobs” in its memory.

Reserved Transmission

Use cursor to select

command.

C001 15/21:30 L.A.Office

C002 15/21:40 Broadcast

B001 15/22:00 Batch Tx

C003 17/08:00 987-6543

C004 17/08:10 N.Y.Office

The Job Review function gives you the power to check on each job (or command) in

your machine’s memory. It also lets you cancel a command of fax transaction if you

decide not to send the document.

The list of Reserved Transmission will appear.

It will be indicated by command numbers, date

and time set to dial, and remote location’s

names or numbers.

You can confirm the following four items:

•

Commands of the fax transaction

If the command is to send a broadcast,

“Broadcast” appears instead of the remote loca-

tion’s name or number. (For more information

of “Broadcasting,” see page 3.24.)

PrintDoc Location Erase

100 most recent fax transactions and result of them

Received printing jobs for out-of-paper reception

Reserved copy jobs

If the command is to send a batch transmission, the LCD shows its batch box

number (such as “B001”) rather than the command number. (For more infor-

mation of “Batch transmission,” see pages 3.26–3.28.)

Note: When your machine is attempting to perform a command now, you can can-

cel it but cannot review other jobs.

If the command is for a Call group dialing, the group number (such as “G01”)

appears instead of the phone number. (For more information of “Call group

dialing,” see page 3.21.)

Reviewing or canceling a command for faxing

Your machine keeps track of each command by assigning it a command number.

Note: If there are no stored commands in your machine, it will beep briefly

Delayed commands, redial attempts and current fax transmissions are all stored in

your fax machine’s memory and given a command number. Your machine can store

up to 99 delayed commands. It identifies each by a two-digit command number rang-

ing from 001 to 099.

and display “No Command” on the LCD. It then returns to standby.

If you want to cancel a command, select the command you want to cancel

using the cursor key.

Press [Er a se].

To see your machine’s stored commands or to cancel them:

To return your machine to standby mode, press RESET.

Press J OB REVIEW

COMM CANCEL.

Note: See also “Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast,” next.

If your machine is attempting to perform a command now, it appears on the

display. If you want to cancel it, skip to step 6.

Otherwise, proceed to step 3.

Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast

You can also review or cancel certain numbers within a broadcast:

Job Review

Use cursor to select

item.

ReservedTransmission 12

Comm. Result

Out-of-paper Rx

Reserved Copy

Select “Reser ved Tr a n sm ission ” and then

press [En ter ].

Press J OB REVIEW

COMM CANCEL.

Note: The number next to “Reserved

Transmission” means how many com-

mands of fax transaction are reserved.

Your machine can store up to 99 com-

mands in its memory. If the number is

“000”, it means there are no commands.

If your machine is attempting to perform a command now, it appears on the

display. If you want to cancel it, skip to step 4.

Otherwise, proceed to step 3.

Enter

Select “Reser ved Tr a n sm ission ” and then press [En ter ].

3.29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Reserved Transmission

Use cursor to select

command.

C001 15/21:30 L.A.Office

C002 15/21:40 Broadcast

B001 15/22:00 Batch Tx

C003 17/08:00 987-6543

C004 17/08:10 N.Y.Office

View the result of fax transaction

Select the command you want to review or can-

cel using the cursor key. Then press [Loca tion ]

to see individual numbers within the broad-

cast.

You can see the 100 most recent fax transactions and result of each transactions

with the following information.

•

Assigned number, starting each day at 001

Remote location called (The destination name)

Resolution mode

PrintDoc Location Erase

Starting date and time

Reserved Transmission

Use cursor to select

command.

001:N.Y.Office

002:L.A.Office

003:Chicago Office

004:London Office

005:Paris Office

Duration, in minutes and seconds

Number of pages you sent or received

The LCD shows:

Note: Press [Loca tion ] again to return to the

Result of the call — If preceded by an asterisk (*), this signifies an ECM commu-

nication. Or, if preceded by #, this signifies an super G3 communication.

previous display.

Select the location you want to cancel using the

cursor key.

Job Review

Use cursor to select

item.

ReservedTransmission 12

Comm. Result

Out-of-paper Rx

Reserved Copy

Press J OB REVIEW

COMM CANCEL.

PrintDoc Location Erase

Press [Er a se].

Note: If the number next to “Com m . Resu lt”

displays “000”, it means there are no

reports in your machine.

If you want to cancel a different location, repeat steps 6–7.

If you do not want to cancel any more locations, press RESET. The machine

will return to standby mode.

Enter

Printing a delayed command list

Your machine can print a command list which tells you:

Comm. Result

Use cursor to select

item.

012 Rx

Select “Com m . Resu lt” and then press

[En ter ]. The LCD will show:

•

The command’s identification number

L.A.Office

N.Y.Office

Paris Office

987-6543

The phone number, or “remote location”

The start time (this appears in a DD,HH:MM format)

008 Tx

011 Rx

007 Tx

006 Tx

Note: Your machine’s LCD shortens the word

Transmission to Tx and the Reception

to Rx.

A “note” telling if the command is a polling or F-Code operation (see pages

3.34–3.36 for more on polling and 3.44–3.53 for more on F-Code communication).

876-5432

Detail

Note: The assigned number starting at 001 is

To print a delayed command list, press MENU, , [List].

assigned separately between Tx and Rx.

Comm. Result

No.012

L.A.Office

Resolution :S-Fine

Start Time :10/26 09:35

Comm. Time :0'42''

:Reception

Printing a stored document

Your fax machine can print out each document stored for delayed transmission.

To print a stored document:

If you want to see the detailed result of each

transaction, press [Deta il].

The LCD will show:

Press [Deta il] again to return to the previous

display.

If you wish to exit this mode, press RESET.

Page

Result

:10

:*OK

Press J OB REVIEW

COMM CANCEL.

List

Detail

Select “Reser ved Tr a n sm ission ” and then press [En ter ].

Select the command you want using the cursor key.

Press [P r in tDoc]. Your machine will print a copy of the stored document.

3.30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Printing a communication result

Your machine can print the individual communication result in the list of Comm.

Result.

Out-of-paper Rx

Receiving

002 21:10 L.A.Office

003 21:22 N.Y.Office

004 21:35 234-5678

005 21:46 N.Y.Office

006 21:55 987-6543

007 22:06 Chicago Office

008 22:30 L.A.Office

Select “Ou t-of-p a p er Rx” and then press

[En ter ]. The list of Out-of-paper Rx will

appear.

It will be indicated by assigned numbers, time

when the document was received, and remote

location’s names or numbers.

Press J OB REVIEW

COMM CANCEL.

Select “Com m . Resu lt” and then press [En ter ].

Note: The assigned number identifies the

Comm. Result

No.012

L.A.Office

Resolution :S-Fine

Start Time :10/26 09:35

Comm. Time :0'42''

:Reception

order in which the documents were received by your machine.

Select the command you want to print and

press [Deta il]. The LCD will show:

Use the cursor key to scroll through items.

Note: Press [Deta il] again to return to the

If you wish to exit this mode, press RESET.

previous display.

Page

Result

:10

:*OK

Press [List].

List

Detail

View the reserved copy jobs

The communication result for that command

will be printed.

You can confirm the reserved copy jobs.

To print all communication results, that is, an activity journal, press MENU,

[Rep or t].

To see the reserved copy jobs:

Job Review

Use cursor to select

item.

Note: You can set your machine to print an activity journal automatically. See

Press J OB REVIEW

COMM CANCEL.

“Setting the Activity journal” on page 3.40 for more detail.

Reserved Transmission 12

Note: The number next to “Reserved Copy”

signifies how many copy jobs are

Comm. Result

Out-of-paper Rx Wait

Reserved Copy

reserved. If the number is “000”, it

means there are no reserved jobs.

View the reserved printing jobs for out-of-paper

reception

Enter

You can confirm the reserved printing jobs for out-of-paper reception.

Reserved Copy

01 09:12 Printing

02 09:14 Scanning

03 09:15 Reserved

04 09:16 Reserved

05 09:17 Reserved

Note: For more information of out-of-paper reception, see page 3.8.

Select “Reser ved Cop y” and then press

[En ter ]. The list of Reserved Copy will appear.

It will be indicated by assigned numbers, time

when operated for the copy job, and state for

each job.

To see the reserved printing jobs:

Job Review

Use cursor to select

item.

ReservedTransmission 12

Comm. Result

Out-of-paper Rx

Reserved Copy

Press J OB REVIEW

COMM CANCEL.

Note: The number next to “Out-of-paper Rx

Wait” signifies how many printing jobs

for out-of-paper reception are reserved.

If the number is “000”, it means there

are no reserved jobs. Your machine can

store up to 250 out-of-paper receptions

in its memory.

Note: The assigned number identifies the

order in which the copy jobs will be

done.

To exit this mode, press RESET.

Enter

3.31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Special features

Your fax machine has numerous special features to make your communication easier.

We’ll cover them here.

Duplex Tx

Use cursor to select

bind position.

Right&Left

The LCD will show:

Top

Select the binding position of your documents.

Then press [En ter ]. The duplex icon will

appear.

Duplexed transmission

You can send 2-sided documents from the ADF.

　　　▲　　　　　　　▼　　　　　Enter

Adjust resolution, contrast and memory trans-

mission, if necessary.

How to set the document

Set the documents as shown below:

Enter the fax number.

Also, enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone

call. (Example: Enter 9 to “dial out” from an office telephone system, or 1 for

long-distance.)

Press START.

Im p or ta n t: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the docu-

ment, press the STOP key.

If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the J ob

Review function. (See page 3.29.)

To send 2-sided documents:

Adjust the document guides to fit the page(s) you’ll be faxing.

Align the edge of your documents and stack them in the ADF fa ce u p .

Communication Options

Use cursor to select

item.

Delayed Tx

Batch Tx

Polling

Press MENU.

Select “Duplex Tx” and press [En ter ].

Cont Polling

Fax & Copy

Duplex Tx

F-Code Tx

FCodePolling

Mix Length

Fax Set Mach Set Enter

3.32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Mixed length transmission

When you want to send the various sized documents with the ADF, turn this feature

on.

Enlarge transmission

You can transmit your document with enlarging.

Note: Enlargement is available only with the FBS.

Note: When you use the FBS glass, you do not need to turn this on.

Note: You can select a preset enlargement ratio, or directly enter the ratio using

the numeric keypad. Also, you can use cursor key to enter the ratio.

Acceptable document size

Acceptable document size for the mixed length transmission is as follows:

Note: You can enter the enlargement ratio from 100% through 400% in 1% steps.

Here’s how:

Half-letter , Letter , Legal

Place the document on the FBS glass and select resolution and contrast you

require.

Letter , Ledger

Press NEXT, [En lr geTx].

To send mixed length documents:

Scan Size

Use cursor to select

scanning width.

If you want to select area that will be enlarged,

proceed to step 4.

Otherwise, skip to step 5.

Set your documents face up into the ADF.

Auto

H.LTR

Letter

H.LTR

11x17

Legal

Letter

Adjust the document guide to fit the docu-

ments.

Press [Sca n Size] then select scan size that

will be enlarged.

Then press [En ter ].

Enter

Note: Refer to “Select scanning area to be

sent,” page 3.2.

Communication Options

Use cursor to select

item.

EnlargeTx:

Press MENU.

Delayed Tx

Batch Tx

Polling

F-Code Tx

FCodePolling

Cont Polling

Fax & Copy

Duplex Tx

Set the enlarge ratio.

Enter enlargement ratio.

Select “Mix Len gth ” using the cursor key and

then press [En ter ].

You can use the REDUCE/ENLARGE key, or

of the cursor key or numeric keypad to enter

enlargement ratio.

Doc.Size : Letter

Ratio

Mix Length

: 100%

Adjust resolution, contrast and memory trans-

mission, if necessary.

Fax Set Mach Set Enter

Press [En ter ].

ScanSize Enter

Enter the fax number.

Also, enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone

call. (Example: Enter 9 to “dial out” from an office telephone system, or 1 for

long-distance.)

Enter the fax number and press START.

Press START.

Im p or ta n t: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the docu-

ment, press the STOP key.

If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the J ob

Review function. (See page 3.29.)

3.33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Fax & Copy

Polling

With the Fax & Copy feature turned on, your machine asks if you want to make a

copy of a document each time it transmits that document from memory.

Polling allows someone to fax a document to you without having to make the call or

pay for it. There are several kinds of polling:

•

Regular polling — Your fax retrieves a document from a remote fax machine.

Note: The Fax & Copy function cannot be used for non memory transmissions.

F-Code polling — Your fax retrieves a document stored as a file in the remote fax

machine. To do this, you must be communicating with another F-code-compatible

fax machine. For more information on F-Code polling, see “F-Code communication,”

pages 3.52–3.53.

Note: Quick Memory transmission (see page 3.70) and the Fax & Copy function

cannot be used at the same time. If both are turned on, Quick Memory will

not work.

Note: The Fax & Copy feature will use the same resolution you set for the trans-

•

Continuous polling — Your fax continuously retrieves a document from any

remote fax machine at a designated time. For example, a hospital pharmacy can

use this to check on orders waiting in fax machines throughout the hospital.

mission for the copy’s scanning resolution.

Using the Fax & Copy function

For polling to work, the remote machine must also be set up to be polled. See the

remote machine’s operating instructions, if necessary.

Place the document and select resolution and contrast you require.

Note: With this function, you cannot select Normal and Halftone resolution.

Regular polling

To set up your machine for regular polling:

Enter MENU and select “Fax & Copy”.

Fax & Copy

Enter fax number.

Press [En ter ].

Make sure the document is inserted in the remote fax machine.

Enter the fax number. Either press a one-touch

key, enter a speed-dial number, call group num-

ber or use the numeric keypad to enter the fax

number.

Polling

Enter fax number.

Press MENU and select “Pollin g” then press

[En ter ]. The LCD shows (see right):

Enter the remote fax machine’s number by

either pressing a one-touch key, entering a

speed-dial number or using the numeric key-

pad.

Group

Clear

Broadcas

If you entered the fax number using a one-touch

key, skip to step 6.

Otherwise, go on to step 5.

Group

Clear

Broadcas

Press START.

To perform the regular polling now, skip to step

Set

Fax & Copy

Ppr. Auto

To perform delayed regular polling, go on to step 5.

100%

The LCD changes copy mode and asks the num-

ber of copies you want to make:

Delayed Tx

Enter Trnsmit Time

04/14:20

Press MENU and select “Dela yed Tx” then

press [En ter ]. The LCD shows (see right):

Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of

copies you want for each page in the document.

Choose from 01 to 99 copies.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the date and

time (use the 24-hour format) when your

machine should perform the delayed regular

polling.

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Note: If you want to quit without transmit-

ting and copying the document, press STOP . The fax returns to

standby mode.

Clear

Enter

Press [En ter ].

Press START to begin the transmission and copying process.

Press START.

3.34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

When your machine polls for documents, it dials the number and, upon making con-

tact with the other machine, begins receiving the document as if the other machine

had placed the call.

Press [En ter ] to save the number.

Press START.

Continuous polling

To set up your machine for continuous polling:

When your machine polls for documents, it dials each number and, upon making

contact with the other machine, begins receiving the document as if the other

machine had placed the call. It will continue the process throughout the time period

you selected in steps 2–5.

Press MENU, select “Con t Pollin g” and then press [En ter ].

Cont Polling

Enter start time.

14:20

The LCD shows the current time:

Note: When you want to end a continuous polling operation, you must delete it

Use the numeric keypad to enter the time your

machine should begin the continuous polling.

(Use the 24-hour format.)

using the Job Review feature (see page 3.29).

Being polled

When the start time is set, press [En ter ] to

save it.

Not only can you poll, but you can also be polled. To set up a document for regular

polling:

Enter

If your machine is set for Tel Ready reception, change the reception mode to

other mode. Your machine ca n ’t be polled if it’s in Tel Ready mode.

Cont Polling

Enter end time.

18:30

Use the numeric keypad to enter the time when

your machine should finish the continuous

polling. (Use the 24-hour format.)

Insert the document.

Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary. (Your fax machine will be trans-

mitting to the machine doing the polling.)

Note: If you set the end time earlier than the

start time, the polling operation will con-

D.Polling

tinue until the selected end time

tomorrow.

Enter

Press MENU, D, [En ter ].

If you want to scan the duplexed documents,

proceed to step 5.

If you want to scan the mixed size documents,

skip to step 7.

Otherwise, skip to step 8.

When the end time is set, press [En ter ] to save it.

Cont Polling

Enter fax number.

Not Stored

Enter the remote fax machine’s number by

either pressing a one-touch key, entering a

speed-dial number or using the numeric key-

pad.

PrintDoc EraseDoc Enter

D.Polling

Use cursor to select

bind position.

Right&Left

Top

If you are entering only one number for contin-

uous polling, skip to step 8.

To add additional fax numbers for this opera-

tion, go on to step 7.

Press NEXT, [Du p .Sca n ]. The LCD will show:

Group

Clear

Broadcas

Select the binding position of your documents.

Then press [En ter ]. The duplex icon will

appear. Skip to step 8.

To add additional fax numbers, press [Br oadcas] between each one to insert a

comma then enter the number as in step 2. You can specify up to 30 numbers

(and/or call groups) for continuous polling.

Press NEXT, [Mix Size]. The Mix size icon will

appear.

　　　▲　　　　　　　▼　　　　　Enter

Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the last fax number.

Press [Stor eDoc]. Your machine will scan the document into memory and

return to standby mode.

Note: If you enter characters by mistake, press [Clea r ] to erase them. Or

press

of the cursor key to select the number then press

Once the remote fax machine polls the document you stored, your fax machine auto-

matically erases the document from memory.

[Clea r ].

3.35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Printing a stored polling document

To print a document you’ve stored for regular polling without erasing it,

press MENU, D, [En ter ], [P r in tDoc].

Transferring documents (Fax forwarding)

This feature tells your fax machine to receive documents and then transfer them

automatically to another fax machine. You can set the time period for which the fax

machine will continue this process.

Erasing a stored polling document

To erase a document you’ve stored for regular polling from your machine’s memory,

press MENU, D, [En ter ], [Er a seDoc], [Er a seDoc].

Note: Fax forwarding will not transfer F-Code reception documents.

Note: Fax forwarding is not available with the Tel Ready mode.

Turning the Fax forwarding on or off

Limiting polling access to your fax machine

O.Fax Forward

Your machine’s closed network setting (see page 3.65) works for polling, also. If a

calling fax doesn’t “present” the proper passcode, it cannot poll from your fax.

Use cursor to set fax

forwarding ON or OFF.

Press MENU,

[Settin g].

[the letter O, not a zero],

OFF

Note: If you’re using the Block Junk Fax feature (see pages 3.65), even incoming

calls which meet the passcode test must come from phone

numbers you’ve approved.

Select ON or OFF using the cursor key.

Press [En ter ].

　　　▲　　　　　　　▼　　　　　Enter

Note: If you assign Fax Forward into a Soft Key,

you can toggle ON and OFF easily. (See page 4.1)

Create the transfer pattern

You can create up to five transfer patterns.

To set up transfer pattern:

O.Fax Forwarding

Enter forward num.

(1-1)

Press MENU,

[En ter ].

[the letter O, not a zero],

01:

If you set up a transfer pattern at your first

time, skip to step 4.

If you have already set up any transfer pattern,

proceed to step 3.

Detail

Erase

Enter

Select the number you want to set up or

change.

01:

Enter remote fax number.

Press [En ter ]. The LCD shows (see right):

Enter the fax number for the remote fax to

which you want documents to be transferred.

Use either a one-touch number, a speed-dial

number, a call group or regular number dialed

from the numeric keypad.

Clear

Enter

If you are entering only one number for transferring, skip to step 7.

To add any additional fax numbers for this operation, proceed to step 6.

3.36

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

O.Fax Forwarding

Enter forward num. (1-2)

To add more fax numbers, press [Br oa d ca s] between each one to insert a

comma, then enter the number as described in step 3. If [Br oa d ca s] is not

appeared on the LCD, press NEXT until it appears.

Press [Exit] to save the setting.

The LCD shows forwarding number and setting

On or Off you’ve entered.

01:123-4567

02:

You can specify up to 301 numbers for transferring.

Note: You can enter only 1 location by using numeric keypad.

To finish, press RESET.

Note: If you enter characters by mistake, press [Clea r ] to clear them.

Detail

Erase

Enter

If you want to erase an existing entry numbers, press

of the

cursor key to select the number then press [Clea r ].

Printing a list of your transfer patterns

01:123-4567

Use cursor to select

item.

FaxForward:OFF

Start Time:-- :**:**

End Time:-- :**:**

You can easily print a list of your transfer patterns. The list includes each pattern’s

identifier number, remote fax’s number where you want documents to be trans-

ferred, On/Off setting, time period and Auto print setting.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting. The LCD will

show:

Select “Fa x For w a r d ” and then press [En ter ].

To print the list, press MENU,

[the letter O, not a zero], [List].

Auto Print:OFF

Select “ON” or “OF F ” then press [En ter ] to

save the setting.

Exit

Enter

01:123-4567

Transmit Time

-- :**:** － -- :**:**

FaxForward:ON

Start Time:-- :**:**

Everyday

Select “Sta r t Tim e” and then press [En ter ].

Enter the day and time. The machine asks time

period that the machine will transfer docu-

ments.

End Time:-- :**:**

Auto Print:OFF

How to en ter th e d a y a n d tim e:

Day

Erase

Enter

•

To enter the day, press [Da y].

To enter the time, using numeric keypad.

If you do not wish to set up the day and time, enter [Er a se].

Note: To change only one digit, move the cursor by using the cursor key to

that digit. Then, overwrite the correct digit.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Select “Au to P r in t” and then press [En ter ].

Automatic printing determines whether the machine will print a document

automatically upon receiving it:

On :

A copy of every document received and transferred is printed at your

machine.

Off:

Received and transferred documents are not printed at your machine.

Note: If the security reception (pages 3.61) is activating, the machine dose

not print received document regardless of this setting.

3.37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Entering the cover page message

Cover page

Press MENU, K, [En ter ].

Your fax machine can store a cover page to send at the beginning of each outgoing

fax. This page includes the current date and time, your Location ID and your fax

number (as stored in the TTI) and a message of up to 40 characters in length. The

information appears in a box similar to this:

K.Cover Page

Cover Page

Upper case

Use the one-touch keypad to enter a message

for the cover page. Enter the message the same

way you entered your fax name during

EasyStart. The message can be up to 40 charac-

ters in length.

Fax Message From:

Nov 26 2001

14:00

Note: If you want to erase characters, press

Chara.

Clear

Enter

[Clea r ] to erase to the left.

Name:

AABBCC Co.

If you want to change just one character in the number, move the cur-

sor by using the cursor key, and press [Clea r ] to erase it. Then

re-enter the number and the message correctly.

Fax Number: 123-4567

[We appreciate your business. Thank you!]

When the message appears as you want it, press [En ter ] to save it.

Turning the cover page on

Printing the cover page

To confirm that the cover page is set correctly, print a sample cover page from your

fax machine. Press MENU, K, [List].

Press MENU, K, [Settin g].

K.Cover Page

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

To tell the fax machine it should send a cover

page before each document you transmit, select

“ON” by using the cursor key.

Note: To tell the machine not to send a cover

page, select “OF F ” and press [En ter ].

　　　▲　　　　　　　▼　　　　　Enter

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Now the cover page feature is working but your message line (shown in the example

as “We appreciate your business. Thank you!”) is blank. To enter that message, see

“Entering the cover page message,” below.

3.38

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

22.Separator Page

Use cursor to select

item.

Cassette

Separate each received document (Separator Page)

Your machine has a simple sorting feature. It can separate each received document

by inserting the separator page on the top of the received document.

Select “P r t on Sep Pa ge” then press [En ter ].

:ON

Prt on Sep Page:OFF

For example, if you use the colored paper for the separator page, it is easy to see the

individual received document.

Note: You can assign the turning this feature on/off to a Soft Key. (See page 4.1.)

Exit

Enter

To set the Separator Page feature:

22.Separator Page

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

Press MENU,

, [En ter ].

Determine if the separator page will be printed

with blank or not.

If you wish that the separator page will be

blank, select “OFF”.

If you wish to print the first page of the

received documents on the separator page,

select “ON”.

Select “22. Sep a r a tor Pa ge” then press [En ter ].

22.Separator Page

Use cursor to select

item.

Select “Sep a r a tor Pa ge” then press [En ter ].

Separator Page :OFF

Prt on Sep Page:OFF

　　　▲　　　　　　　▼　　　　　Enter

Note: “P r t on Sep Pa ge” will be gray unless

the Separator Page feature is turned

on.

Exit

Enter

22.Separator Page

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

To turn the Separator Page feature on, select

“ON” using the cursor key. Then press [En ter ].

Press ENTER to save the settings.

　　　▲　　　　　　　▼　　　　　Enter

Press [Exit].

Press RESET to finish.

22.Separator Page

Use cursor to select

cassette.

1st Cassette

2nd Cassette

Select the paper source for the separator page

using the cursor key. Then press [En ter ].

　　　▲　　　　　　　▼　　　　　Enter

3.39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Setting the activity journal

Just as a checkbook records your daily financial transactions, your fax machine

keeps an activity journal which records its 125 most recent fax transactions. The

activity journal lists the following information for each transaction:

Setting the reports: TCRs and RCRs

Your fax machine can print reports of transmissions and receptions.

There are two different reports: a transmit confirmation report (TCR) and a receive

confirmation report (RCR). You can receive a TCR after sending a fax to any Group 3 fax

machine, but the RCR function works only when you send a fax to a compatible Muratec

machine. (Consult your authorized Muratec dealer with any questions about such

compatibility.) Choose the type of report you want, based on the fax machines to

which you’re transmitting.

•

Assigned number, starting each day at 001

Remote location called

Resolution mode

Starting date and time

Duration, in minutes and seconds

Length, in number of pages

Department code (see pages 4.12–4.16)

What the reports tell you

TCR

The TCR lists the following information for each communication:

Result of the call — If preceded by an asterisk (*), this signifies an ECM commu-

nication. Or, if preceded by #, this signifies an super G3 communication.

•

Date and time of the TCR’s printout

Remote location called

•

Any special operations — For example, a fax call made using an optional handset

will appear as “Manual”

Resolution mode

Starting date and time

Duration, in minutes and seconds

Length, in number of pages

Result of the call

Your fax machine will print the activity journal automatically after 100 transac-

tions. To toggle this automatic printing on or off:

G.Journal & Reports

Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, G, [En ter ]. The LCD shows (see

right):

Journal

Report

:OFF

Any special operations — For example, a fax call made using an optional handset

will appear as “Manual”

Select “J ou r n a l” and then press [En ter ].

ReportType:TCR

Line up :OFF

•

Sample of the document — An image of the first page of the document

Select “ON” and then press [En ter ] to save the

setting.

If an error occurs, the TCR tells you the remote location which was called, the error

code and error message (see pages 5.11–5.14).

Enter

Printing an activity journal manually

RCR

To print an activity journal immediately without waiting for 100 transmissions to be

completed, press MENU, G, [Rep or t].

The RCR lists the following information for each communication:

•

Date and time

Remote location called

Setting the printing order of the activity journal

Your fax machine prints the activity journal for every fax transaction. For example,

if your machine has to redial a call, it will list those redials on the journal.

Assigned number, starting each day at 001

Resolution mode

If you want to list those activities in the order of their assigned numbers, you can

change the printing order of the activity journal.

Duration, in minutes and seconds

Length, in number of pages

To change the printing order:

Result of the call — Either “OK” or an error code (see pages 5.17–5.18)

Press MENU, G, [En ter ] and then select “Lin e Up ” then press [En ter ].

Select “ON” and then press [En ter ].

3.40

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

To set the printing one of these reports:

Numbering pages

Just before sending a fax, you can set your fax machine to number each page. This

will help the person receiving the fax to keep track of all the pages.

G.Journal & Reports

Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, G, [En ter ].

Journal :OFF

Report

To set up page numbering:

Select “Rep or tTyp e” then press [En ter ].

:OFF

ReportType:TCR

Line up :OFF

Count the number of pages in your document.

Set your document in ADF or FBS glass.

Enter

Adjust the resolution and contrast, if necessary.

Report Type

Press NEXT until [#OfPa ges] is appeared.

Use cursor to select

TCR or RCR.

Select confirmation report type “TCR” or

“RCR” by using the cursor key.

Number of Pages

Enter num. of pages.(1-50)

TCR

RCR

Press [#OfPa ges].

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of

pages in your document.

Enter

Press [En ter ].

Clear

Enter

G.Journal & Reports

Use cursor to select

item.

From here, continue sending the document using

To print the selected report automatically after

every fax you send, select “Rep or t”, and then

press [En ter ].

whatever type of transmission you need (broadcast, group dial, etc.). When the

remote fax machine prints the document, a note on the right side of your TTI will

indicate the number of the page — such as “P.02” for page two.

Journal :OFF

Report

:OFF

ReportType:TCR

Line up :OFF

Enter

Report

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

Select “ON” using the cursor key.

OFF

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

To turn the confirmation report feature on or off for

only the next fax transmission, press REP ORT.

Enter

What happens next depends on the setting you chose:

•

If the light next to the REP ORT key glows, the fax machine will print the

confirmation report automatically.

•

If the light next to the REP ORT key doesn’t glow, the fax machine will not print a

confirmation report.

After you send this transmission, your machine returns to the setting you chose in

step 2, above.

3.41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

OneLine + distinctive ring detection

Many phone companies now offer their customers a special service which makes it

possible for one phone line to do the work of two.

Contact your phone company to make sure it has set up DRD service for you. If

possible, also find out which distinctive ring pattern the phone company has

assigned you.

21.Set DRD

With this service, you physically still have one phone line, but, electronically, you

have two phone numbers. Your phone recognizes these different numbers and rings

differently for each one.

Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, , 2, 1, [En ter ]. The LCD shows:

DRD :OFF

Ring Pattern:A

For example, this makes it easy for you to have both a business number and a home

number on one phone line, so you can answer one with “Jane Doe Consulting,” and

the other with “Hello.” This works because you can tell the difference between the

distinctive patterns of the two rings.

Exit

Enter

Your fax machine is also smart enough to tell the difference between two different

numbers that are ringing it. All you have to do is set up your machine for the

OneLine + distinctive ring detection (DRD) feature.

21.Set DRD

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

Select “DRD”, then press [En ter ].

In order to use OneLine + DRD, your phone company must set up your distinctive

ring service. When it does, it will assign a ring pattern. For example, the standard

telephone ring is 2 seconds “on” (ringing) and 4 seconds “off” (silent), after which it

repeats itself.

OFF

Select “ON” or “OF F ” using the cursor key and

then press [En ter ].

Your fax has eight possible distinctive ring patterns for use with OneLine + DRD.

One of them should work with your phone company’s DRD service. This chart lists

the patterns:

Enter

21.Set DRD

Use cursor to select

item.

Select the “Rin g Pa tter n ” and then press

[En ter ].

Pa tter n

On e com p lete r in g p a tter n (secon d s)

Select the ring pattern you want.

0.8 on, 0.4 off, 0.8 on, 4.0 off

0.4 on, 0.2 off, 0.4 on, 0.2 off, 0.8 on, 4.0 off

0.3 on, 0.2 off, 1.0 on, 0.2 off, 0.3 on, 4.0 off

1.0 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 3.5 off

Press [En ter ] to set your machine to the

selected ring pattern.

Enter

Im p or ta n t: If your telephone company gives you only very general ring pattern

specifications, or if you encounter a problem while using your

machine’s DRD feature, p lea se tr y ALL of th e listed r in g p a tter n s.

If you still have a problem after trying a ll of the patterns, please call

the Muratec Customer Support Center. (From the United States, call

972-364-3350. For the number to call from Canada, check the

documentation found inside your fax machine’s box).

0.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 3.0 off

0.5 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 3.0 off

0.4 on, 0.6 off, 0.4 on, 4.6 off

1.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 3.5 off

Im p or ta n t: With your machine set for using DRD, it won’t respond to any ring pat-

tern other than the one you selected above. To reset the fax so it will

respond once again to normal rings, repeat steps 2–4, above — except,

in step 4, toggle it to “Off.” Your fax will now respond normally.

For example: pattern

is 0.3 seconds ringing, 0.2 seconds silent, 1 second ringing,

0.2 seconds silent, 0.3 seconds ringing and 4 seconds silent. Then it goes back to the

first 0.3-second ring and starts over.

To use DRD on your fax machine:

3.42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Tell the person at the other fax machine to press START and to hang up

Call request

his/her handset. Don’t hang up your handset yet!

You can send or receive a fax message and have a regular phone conversation on the

same call (although, not at the same time). This is called a call request. It doesn’t

matter whether you’re sending the fax or receiving it. You may fax first and then

talk, or talk first and then fax.

When you hear fax tones, press START and hang up your machine’s optional

handset. Your machine will receive the document and print it out.

Responding to a call request

If someone requests a call from you during a fax communication, you’ll hear a long

ring after the receiving machine has received each page. To answer the call request:

Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, the remote fax machine must have a similar

call-request capability. Your machine must also have an optional

handset attached.

Note: Communicating this way disables “V.34” mode, causing the fax machine to

handle the call in normal ITU-T Group 3 fashion. See page AI.2 for more

information.

Lift your machine’s optional handset, and listen for a few seconds. You may

hear a brief series of fax tones.

Shortly, the line will open and the person at the other end of the line will

answer. You and the other person now can have a normal phone conversation.

Faxing/receiving first, then talking

To send or receive a fax first and then talk:

While your fax machine is sending or receiving the fax, press MONITOR/CALL.

The power of QuadAccess^®

At the remote fax machine, the ringer will sound after that machine receives

each page.

Your fax machine’s QuadAccess feature sharply reduces the time you might spend

waiting for the machine to finish its work. QuadAccess is a more powerful version of

what already is a pretty powerful feature, called dual access. While a fax with normal

dual access allows you to do two things at once, QuadAccess allows you to do four

operations at once. For example, even if the machine is (1) printing a copy, (2) trans-

mitting from memory and (3) scanning documents for a different memory

transmission, you can still (4) program the machine.

If someone answers at the remote fax machine, your fax machine will ring

several times. If so, pick up the optional handset. In a few seconds, the line

will open and you can begin your conversation.

Talking first, then sending a fax

To talk first and then send a fax:

When you’ve finished your phone conversation, don’t hang up.

Insert the document you want to fax.

Adjust the resolution and contrast if necessary.

Tell the person at the other fax machine to press START and to hang up

his/her handset. Don’t hang up you r handset yet!

When you hear fax tones, press START and hang up your fax machine’s

optional handset. Your fax machine will send the document.

Talking first, then receiving a fax

To talk first and then receive a fax:

When you’ve finished your phone conversation, don’t hang up.

3.43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

F-Code communication

F-Code: an introduction

Creating or modifying an F-Code box

The ITU-T, the United Nations agency that standardizes international telecommuni-

cations, has created a fax industry standard for using sub-addressing and

password-based communication. One name for this standard is F-Code, and that’s

what we’ll call it in these instructions and on your machine’s display.

Choosing the F-Code box type

Before you set up an F-Code box, first decide how your callers will use it — as a

bulletin box, a security box or a relay box.

•

Bu lletin box — Stores documents that people in remote locations retrieve by

polling the box. For example, your sales branches could call in at any time to get

a printout of your latest prices that you’ve stored in a bulletin box.

How sub-addressing works

To help understand sub-addressing, think about how someone in a large company

receives mail. For example, mail for the Accounting department is first delivered to

the company’s main mailroom. Then the mailroom routes the mail to Accounting.

A bulletin box stores both scanned and retrieved documents, and it holds its

contents indefinitely (as long as the unit has AC power).

That’s the idea behind sub-addressing. Your fax and another F-Code-compatible fax

exchange special signals to indicate just where the fax really should go. It’s as if the

sending fax is saying, “Deliver this to room 48,” and the receiving fax does just that.

•

Secu r ity box — Receives and stores F-Code secure communications.

Rela y box — Receives documents, then relays them to other machines. The

machine that relays the document is called a “hub”. Your fax machine can either

send to a hub or it can be a hub.

Your machine has up to 50 mailboxes for these special deliveries. When someone

sends an F-Code fax to you, your machine receives it into one of those 50 mailboxes

— whichever box the sender chooses.

4 elements of an F-Code box

Each F-Code box has the following four elements:

(1) F-Code box number (01-50)

Sending F-Code securely

For greater security, you can set up a password with each F-Code sub-address,

which lets you use secure transmission, polling and relay broadcasting when com-

municating with any other F-Code compatible fax machine.

(2) F-Code box name (up to 16 characters)

(3) F-Code sub-address (up to 20 characters - can include numbers and the * and #

characters only)

Guidelines for using F-Code

(4) I.D. Code (4 digits)

(1) To use ITU-T sub-addressing, you must create F-Code boxes in your machine

You will choose the information for each of these elements, and enter it into your

machine. The following steps will walk you through entering and changing that

information.

(2) Your machine holds up to 50 of these boxes

(3) Your machine stores up to 30 documents into each F-Code box (each document

can include one or more pages)

3.44

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

If you ch ose Secu r ity:

To create or modify an F-Code box:

01:Security Box

SetBox

Keep pen and paper with you as you follow these steps. As you decide on a

sub-address and enter it into your machine, write it down. Remember to: (1)

write down which box goes with which sub-address, (2) write down any pass-

Use cursor to select

item.

The security box has the following settings:

•

Box Na m e – You can enter the name for

this F-Code box.

Box Name

Sub-Address :

words or

D. codes you enter, (3) keep these printed records in a safe place.

N.F-Code Box

Password

Hold Time

:00 Day

•

ITU-T su b-a d d r ess – This is the numerical

identifier you must enter in order to commu-

nicate with any remote F-Code compatible

fax.

Enter box number. (01-50)

Press MENU, N, [En ter ]. The LCD shows the

F-Code box list.

Exit

Enter

01:

02:

03:

04:

05:

Select the F-Code box you want to create or

modify using the cursor key.

•

ITU-T p a ssw or d – This is the password for ITU-T-compatible F-Code fax

transactions. You don’t need to have a password for the F-Code box.

However, using a password will make your F-Code communication much

more secure.

Note: You can select the F-Code box by

directly entering that two-digit identi-

fier number (01-50).

Detail EraseBox Set Box

•

Hold tim e – This setting is how long you want to keep a document stored

Note: You can press [Deta il] to see the number which has been pro-

in your machine’s F-Code box.

grammed in that speed-dial number.

D. cod e for th is F -Cod e box – This is the four-digit I.D. code for the

01:Security Box

Enter I.D.code

****

01:AABBCC

02:DDEEFF

03:GGHHII

04:

05:

SetBox

box’s security, which you use to (1) print a document any remote F-Code-

compatible fax sends to this F-Code box or (2) you enter before you can

make any changes to this F-Code box. (See step 12.)

Press [BoxSet].

What you do next depends on whether you’re

creating or modifying the F-Code box:

If creating — skip to step 6.

To enter the Box name:

If modifying — the LCD asks you to enter the

Select “Box Na m e” using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

proper

I.D. code. The LCD shows (see right):

Enter

Then, enter the name the same way you entered your fax name during

EasyStart. An F-Code box’s name can be up to 16 characters in length.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the 4-digit

.D.

code (not the ITU-T sub-address and not the ITU-T password) and then press

[En ter ].

Note: To erase characters, press [Clea r ] to erase to the left.

To change just one character in the name, move the cursor to that

character and then press [Clea r ] to erase it. Then re-enter the name

correctly.

•

If you modifying the Security box, go to step 7.

If you modifying the Bulletin box, skip to step 16.

If you modifying the Relay box, skip to step 28.

Press [En ter ] to save the box’s name and continue.

Note: You cannot change the type of an existing F-Code box. If you’re modi-

fying an existing F-Code box and want to change the box type, you

first must erase the old box, then create a new one.

To enter the ITU-T sub-address:

Select “Su b-Ad d r ess” using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

01:Not Stored

Then, use the numeric keypad to enter this box’s ITU-T sub-address to identify

this F-Code box.

The sub-address can be up to 20 characters in length and include any combi-

nation of numbers and the * and # characters (but no other non-numeric

characters).

Use cursor to select

box type.

Security Box

Bulletin Box

Relay Box

The fax machine is asking which box type you

want to assign to this box — bulletin, security

or relay.

Select desired box type using the cursor key

and then press [En ter ].

Note: No other F-Code box in this machine can have the same sub-address

Enter

•

If you chose Security, go to step 7.

If you chose Bulletin, skip to step 16.

If you chose Relay, skip to step 28.

as the one you enter here.

3.45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Note: To erase characters, press [Clea r ] to erase to the left.

Decide on a four-digit

Wr ite it d ow n , and put it in a safe place.

D. code (0001-9999) for this F-Code box.

To change just one character in the name, move the cursor to that

character and then press [Clea r ] to erase it. Then re-enter the name

correctly.

Im p or ta n t: Do not use 0000 as an D. code.

Press [En ter ] to save the ITU-T sub-address and continue.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit I.D. code for this F-Code box.

Im p or ta n t: After completing this step, you must know this code to print

To enter the ITU-T password:

documents sent to this F-Code box. Be sure to write it down.

Select “Pa ssw or d ” using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

Press ENTER to save the F-Code box information.

Then, use the numeric keypad to enter this box’s ITU-T-compatible password.

This password can be up to 20 characters in length and include any combina-

tion of numbers and the * and # characters (but no other non-numerical

characters).

To create or modify another F-Code box, go back to step 3.

To finish, press RESET.

If you ch ose Bu lletin :

Note: To erase characters, press [Clea r ] to erase to the left.

To change just one character in the name, move the cursor to that

character and then press [Clea r ] to erase it. Then re-enter the name

correctly.

01:Bulletin Box

SetBox

Use cursor to select

item.

The bulletin box has the following settings:

•

Box Na m e – Same as in step 7.

Box Name

Sub-Address :

Password

ITU-T su b-a d d r ess – Same as in step 7.

ITU-T p a ssw or d – Same as in step 7.

Press [En ter ] to save the ITU-T password and continue.

Rx Protect :OFF

Auto Print :OFF

To enter the Hold time:

Rx P r otect — Reception protection(“Rx

Protect” on the LCD) tells this box if it’s okay

to receive documents from remote locations.

Callers can then poll these documents.

Exit

Enter

Select “Hold Tim e” using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

01:Bulletin Box

SetBox

Use cursor to select

item.

OverwriteDoc:OFF

Erase Tx Doc:OFF

Then, use the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit number indicating how

many days (00-31), you want your fax machine to keep received documents in

this F-Code box.

•

Au to P r in t — Automatic printing of

received documents (“Auto Print”) tells the

fax machine if it should print a document

automatically upon receiving it into this box.

Note: Your fax machine can store incoming documents in F-Code boxes (up

to 30 documents) as long as 31 days, after which it automatically

erases the documents. But if your machine has plenty of memory, you

may want to override the 31-day limit in order to keep the documents

indefinitely. If so, enter 00. If you choose this, you will have to delete

documents manually. (You may want to contact your authorized

Muratec dealer regarding optional memory expansion.)

Exit

Enter

•

Over w r ite Doc — Overwriting documents

(“Overwrite Doc.”) tells your machine if it should overwrite (erase) existing

documents when it receives a new one.

Er a se Tx Doc — Erasure of transmitted documents (“Erase Tx Doc.”) tells

your machine if it should erase a document from the box after a caller

retrieves (polls) the document.

Press [En ter ] to save the sub-address and continue.

D. cod e for th is F -Cod e box – This is the four-digit I.D. code for the

01:Security Box

Enter I.D.code

0000

Box Name

Sub-Address :12345678

Password

Hold Time :00 Day

SetBox

box’s security, which you use to (1) print a document any remote F-Code-

compatible fax sends to this F-Code box or (2) you enter before you can

make any changes to this F-Code box. (See step 24.)

Press [Exit].

The machine asks for your F-Code box’s four-

digit security

the box’s security, which you use to (1) print a

document any remote F-Code-compatible fax

sends to this F-Code box or (2) you enter before

you can make any changes to this F-Code box.

:AABBCC

D. code. This is the I.D. code for

To enter the Box name:

This is same procedure in step 8. Please refer to step 8.

Enter

3.46

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

To enter the ITU-T sub-address:

To set the Erase Tx Doc:

This is same procedure in step 9. Please refer to step 9.

Select “Er a se Tx Doc” using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

Then, select desired setting “On” or “Off”.

To enter the ITU-T password:

On: Your machine erases the document from the box as soon as it sends it. If

you choose “On”, this box can be polled only once per document.

Off: Your machine does not erase a document from the box when it’s polled.

As long as your machine holds AC power and you do not erase the docu-

ment from the box, the document is available indefinitely for polling.

This is same procedure in step 10. Please refer to step 10.

To set the Rx Protect:

Select “Rx P r otect” using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

Then, select desired setting “On” or “Off”.

01:Bulletin Box

Enter I.D.code

0000

SetBox

On: Do not open this box to receive documents from callers.

Off: Open this box to receive documents from callers.

Press [Exit].

The machine asks for your F-Code box’s four-

Box Name

Sub-Address :12345678

Password

:AABBCC

Press [En ter ] to save the box’s name and continue.

digit security

D. code. This is the I.D. code for

the box’s security, which you use to (1) print a

document any remote F-Code-compatible fax

sends to this F-Code box or (2) you enter before

you can make any changes to this F-Code box.

Px Protect :OFF

Auto Print :ON

To set the Auto Print:

Enter

Note: This setting is available only when the reception protection (Rx pro-

tect) setting is set to off (see step 20).

Select “Au to P r in t” using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

Decide on a four-digit

D. code (0001-9999) for this F-Code box.

Wr ite it d ow n , and put it in a safe place.

Then, select desired setting “On” or “Off”.

Im p or ta n t: Do not use 0000 as an D. code.

On: Print the document automatically when the box receives it.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit

D. code for this F-Code box.

Off: Print the document manually, when you want to print it.

Im p or ta n t: After completing this step, you must know this code to access

Press [En ter ] to save the box’s name and continue.

this F-Code box. Be sure to write it down.

To set the Overwrite Doc:

Press ENTER to save the F-Code box information.

Note: This setting is available only when the reception protection (Rx pro-

To create or modify another F-Code box, go back to step 3.

To finish, press RESET.

tect) setting is set to off (see step 20).

Select “Over w r ite Doc” using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

Then, select desired setting “On” or “Off”.

On: When your machine receives a new document into this box, it will erase

any documents currently stored in it.

Off: When your machine receives a new document into this box, it will not

erase the documents stored in it. Your machine can store up to 30

documents (each document can include one or more pages) in each box.

Press [En ter ] to save the box’s name and continue.

3.47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

If you ch ose Rela y:

To set the TTI Type:

01:Relay Box

SetBox

Select “TTI Typ e” using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

Use cursor to select

item.

Box Name

Sub-Address :

Password

Location

TTI Type

The bulletin box has the following settings:

Then, select the type of TTI you want to appear on the faxes that are relayed

to other callers.

•

Box Na m e – Same as in step 7.

ITU-T su b-a d d r ess – Same as in step 7.

ITU-T p a ssw or d – Same as in step 7.

01:Relay Box

Use cursor to select

TTI.

Sender

Both

Yours

SetBox

•

Sen d er — Relay the document with hub

unit’s TTI (don’t send your TTI).

:Sender

Loca tion – You must enter the fax number

of the remote unit. When your machine

received document into the relay box, it dials

to this number to relay the received docu-

ment.

Exit

Enter

•

Both — Relay the document with both the

hub unit’s TTI and your TTI.

01:Relay Box

SetBox

Use cursor to select

item.

Auto Print :OFF

•

You r s — Relay the document with your TTI

instead of the hub unit’s.

Enter

•

TTI Typ e – You can select the type of TTI

you want to appear on the faxes that are

relayed to other callers.

Press [En ter ] to save the box’s name and continue.

To set the Auto Print:

Exit

Enter

•

Au to P r in t – You can set your machine to

print the received document received into the relay box.

Select “Au to P r in t” using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

D. cod e for th is F -Cod e box – This is the four-digit I.D. code for the

Then, select desired setting “On” or “Off”.

box’s security, which you use to enter before you can make any changes to

this F-Code box. (See step 35.)

On: Print the document automatically when it’s received.

Off: The machine does not print it, but only relays it to the other machine.

To enter the Box name:

Press [En ter ] to save the box’s name and continue.

This is same procedure in step 8. Please refer to step 8.

To enter the ITU-T sub-address:

01:Relay Box

Enter I.D.code

0000

Box Name

Sub-Address :12345678

Password

Location

TTI Type

SetBox

Press [Exit].

The machine asks for your F-Code box’s four-

digit security

the box’s security, which you use to enter before

you can make any changes to this F-Code box.

:AABBCC

This is same procedure in step 9. Please refer to step 9.

To enter the ITU-T password:

D. code. This is the I.D. code for

: 01,S001

:Sender

This is same procedure in step 10. Please refer to step 10.

Enter

Decide on a four-digit

this F-Code box.

I.D. code (0001-9999) for

To enter the Location:

01:Relay Box

Enter remote fax number.

SetBox

Wr ite it d ow n , and put it in a safe place.

Im p or ta n t: Do not use 0000 as an D. code.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit .D. code for this F-Code box.

Select “Loca tion ” using the cursor key, and

then press [En ter ].

Then, enter the fax number using a one-touch

key, a speed-dial number or a call group num-

ber. You cannot use the numeric keypad to

enter these numbers.

Im p or ta n t: After completing this step, you must know this code to access

this F-Code box. Be sure to write it down.

Group

Clear

Enter

Press ENTER to save the F-Code box information.

To add each fax number, press [Br oa d ca s] between each one to insert a

comma, then enter the number. You can specify up to 300 numbers for a

remote unit.

To create or modify another F-Code box, go back to step 3.

To finish, press RESET.

Press [En ter ] to save the box’s name and continue.

3.48

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Printing a list of F-Code boxes

Using a security box

The list of F-Code boxes includes:

Printing a document you receive

When your fax machine receives a document via ITU-T sub-addressing to an F-Code

security box, your machine prints a message to let you know.

(1) Each box’s identifier number

(2) Box name (if any)

(3) Sub-address

(4) Password

(5) Box type

(6) Each box’s settings

The message lists:

(1) the F-Code box number that received the document

(2) the Box name

(3) the remote machine’s TTI (if any)

(4) the file numbers stored in the F-Code box.

To print a list of your F-Code boxes, press MENU, N, [BoxList].

You then have a certain number of days (see step 11 on page 3.46) in which to print

out the document before your machine automatically erases it.

Printing a list of documents stored in F-Code boxes

Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:

The list of documents stored in your machine’s F-Code boxes includes:

•

You must know the F-Code security box’s two-digit number.

You must know the F-Code security box’s four-digit D. code.

(1) Each box’s identifier number

(2) Box name (if any)

(3) Box type

To print a received message:

(4) Each file number (or document number) that is stored

N.F-Code Box

Enter box number. (01-50)

Press MENU, N, [En ter ]. The LCD shows F-Code

list.

To print a list of documents stored in F-Code boxes, press MENU, N, [Doc.List].

01:Security Box

02:Bulletin Box

03:Relay Box

04:

Select the F-Code security box that holds the

documents you want to print.

05:

Note: If the F-Code security box is storing any

Detail EraseBox SetBox

documents, the

on the LCD.

symbol is appeared

Press NEXT, [P r in tDoc].

The machine prompts you to enter

I.D. code.

O1.Security Box

Enter I.D.code.

****

01:Security Box

02:Bulletin Box

03:Relay Box

04:

PrintDoc

Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code

box’s four-digit I.D. code.

Press [En ter ].

If you’ve entered the correct I.D. code, your fax

machine prints all documents in the F-Code

security box and then erases them.

05:

Enter

3.49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Printing a document stored in a bulletin box

You can print a document stored in your machine’s F-Code bulletin boxes without

erasing the document from memory.

Using a bulletin box

Storing a document

Your fax machine can store up to 30 documents in each bulletin box.

To print a stored document:

Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:

Press MENU, N, [En ter ].

•

The bulletin box must exist on your fax machine.

The LCD shows the F-Code list.

You must know the bulletin box’s two-digit number (01-50) and four-digit

Select the F-Code bulletin box where you want to store the document.

D. code. (See “Creating or Modifying an F-Code box,” pages 3.44–3.48, if

necessary.)

Press NEXT, [P r in tDoc].

The machine prompts you to enter

code.

To store a document in a bulletin box for polling.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit

D. code

02:Bulletin Box

Place the document and make any necessary adjustments.

PrintDoc

02:Bulletin Box

Enter I.D.code

****

01:Security Box

02:Bulletin Box

03:Relay Box

04:

StoreDoc

Enter file number. (00-30)

Press [En ter ].

If you’ve entered the correct

play shows (see right):

Press MENU, N, [En ter ]. The LCD shows the F-

Code list.

I.D. code, the dis-

00:All stored documents.

01:Already stored.

02:Not Stored.

03:Not Stored.

04:Not Stored.

Select the F-Code bulletin box where you want

to store the document.

Select the file number (01-30) of the document

you want to print. If you want to print all docu-

ments in this bulletin box, select file number

“00”.

05:

Press NEXT, [Stor eDoc].

Enter

The machine prompts you to enter the

code.

Press [En ter ].

Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit

D. code

02:Bulletin Box

Your fax machine prints the chosen document(s), then returns to standby

mode.

StoreDoc

Use cursor to select

"Overwrite" or "Add".

Overwrite

Add

Press [En ter ].

If you’ve entered the correct

play shows (see right):

I.D. code, the dis-

Erasing a document stored in a bulletin box

Select “Over w r ite” or “Ad d ”.

To erase a stored document:

Over wr ite: Your bulletin box erases the cur-

rently stored document when a new document

is stored in it

Press MENU, N, [En ter ].

Enter

The LCD shows the F-Code list.

Select the F-Code box storing the document you want to erase.

Ad d : Your bulletin box keeps both the currently stored document and the new

document, up to 30 documents in each box.

Press NEXT, [Er a seDoc].

The machine prompts you to enter

Scanning(Cancel:PressSTOP)

Nov 26,2001 Tue. 13:30

code.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting. Your machine

starts scanning the document into the selected

bulletin box:

02:Bulletin Box

Enter I.D.code

****

01:Security Box

02:Bulletin Box

03:Relay Box

04:

EraseDoc

Fax Ready

Bulletin Box

File No.:01

Memory 99%

P01

LTR

Normal

NextDoc.

Yes

Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit

.D. code, and then press [En ter ].

If you’ve entered the correct

play shows (see right):

I.D. code, the dis-

Note: The file number (shown above as 1)

tells you how many documents are in

this bulletin box. Your machine num-

bers files 1-30. You need to know the

file’s number to erase or print it.

Yes

05:

Enter

3.50

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Erasing an empty F-Code box

An F-Code box must be empty in order to erase it. (If you select an F-Code box in

these steps which is not empty, the machine beeps. If this happens, print all docu-

ments in that box before erasing it.)

Select the file number (01-30) of the document you want to erase.

If you want to erase the all documents in this bulletin box, select file number

“00”.

02:Bulletin Box

OK to erase?

EraseDoc

Press [En ter ].

The LCD shows (see right):

To erase an empty F-Code box:

00:All stored documents.

01:Already stored.

02:Already stored.

03:Not stored.

Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without eras-

ing the document you’ve selected,

press [Ca n cel]. The fax will

Press MENU, N, [En ter ].

04:Not stored.

Select the F-Code box you want to erase.

return to step 2.

Cancel Erase

Press [Er a seBox]. If the F-Code box is empty, the machine prompts you to

enter I.D. code.

Press [Er a se] to erase the document(s) and the

machine will return to step 2.

Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box’s four-digit I.D. code.

If you want to erase other document, repeat steps 2–7.

To return to the standby mode, press RESET.

Press [En ter ].

The LCD shows (see right):

Note: If you want to quit without erasing the F-Code box you’ve selected,

Using a relay box

press [Ca n cel]. The machine will return to step 2.

Once your fax machine receives a document via ITU-T sub-addressing to one of its

F-Code relay boxes, it sends it to the other fax machines that you’ve set up on your

relay box. (See “Creating or Modifying an F-Code box”, page 3.44–3.48.)

Note: If you want to quit without erasing any F-Code box, press RESET. The

machine returns to standby mode.

Press [Er a se] to erase the document(s) and the machine will return to step 2.

If you want to erase other F-Code box, repeat steps 2–6.

To return to the standby mode, press RESET.

If you set the Auto print mode to on when you created the relay box, your machine

will print the received document, then relay it to the other machine. Otherwise,

your machine will only relay it to the other machines, not print it. See “If you chose

Relay,” page 3.50 for more details on this setting.

Also, you can send (relay broadcast initiation) the document to another hub

machine’s F-Code box and get that machine to relay it to others. See “F-Code trans-

mission” on page 3.52 for more detail.

The hub performs a relay broadcast, and the machine which sends the original doc-

ument to the hub has performed a relay broadcast initiation.

3.51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

F-Code Tx

Enter fax number.

F-Code transmission and polling

Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-

touch key, entering a speed-dial number or

dialing from the numeric keypad.

With F-Code, your machine can send secure transmissions, perform relay broadcast

initiations and even poll from other ITU-T-equipped machines, regardless of manu-

facturer.

You can do this two ways:

Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press START, if you want

to delay this transmission.

•

Using the programmable one-touch key (see pages 3.54–3.60).

Group

Clear

Broadcas

What you do now depends on when you want

the transmission to begin.

Entering the ITU-T sub-address and password directly, which is what we’ll

describe here.

•

To have it begin now, skip to step 13.

Note: For F-Code communication to work, three things must be true:

To delay it, go on to step 11.

•

The remote fax machine must support ITU-T sub-addressing

Delayed Tx

Enter Trnsmit Time

04/14:20

The remote fax must have a mailbox with an ITU-T sub-address created

on it

Press MENU, select “Dela yed Tx” and then

press [En ter ].

The LCD shows (see right):

•

You must know the ITU-T sub-address and password (if any) for the

remote machine’s mailbox

Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and

time when the transmission should begin, then

press [En ter ].

F-Code transmission

Clear

Enter

Place the document and select the resolution and contrast you require.

Press START.

If you want to toggle between manual transmission and memory transmis-

sion, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.

If in step 10 you chose an immediate transmission, your fax machine begins dialing.

If you chose a delayed command, the machine shows “Reserved” on the LCD, indicat-

ing that it has stored the command in memory and will complete it later.

Press MENU and select “F -Cod e Tx”.

Press [En ter ].

F-Code polling

F-Code Tx

Enter sub-address.

SubAddress :

FCodePolling

Enter sub-address.

SubAddress :

Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropri-

ate sub-address in the remote machine.

Press MENU and select “F Cod ePollin g”.

Password

Note: If you make a mistake, press [Clea r ] to

erase the character, then enter the cor-

rect number.

Press [En ter ].

Password

Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropri-

ate sub-address in the remote machine.

Clear

Enter

Press [En ter ].

Clear

Enter

Note: If you make a mistake, press [Clea r ] to

Use the numeric keypad to enter the password.

erase the character, then enter the correct number.

Note: If this sub-address does not have a password, skip to step 8.

Press [En ter ].

Use the numeric keypad to enter the password.

Note: If this sub-address does not have a password, skip to next step.

Press [En ter ].

3.52

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

FCodePolling

Enter fax number.

Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-

touch key, entering a speed-dial number or

dialing from the numeric keypad.

Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press START, if you want

to delay this transmission.

Group

Clear

Broadcas

What you do now depends on when you want

the transmission to begin.

•

To have it begin now, skip to step 11.

To delay it, go on to step 9.

Delayed Tx

Enter Trnsmit Time

04/14:20

Press MENU, select “Dela yed Tx” and then

press [En ter ].

The LCD shows (see right):

Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and

time when the transmission should begin, then

press [En ter ].

Clear

Enter

Press START.

If in step 8 you chose an immediate transmission, your fax machine begins dialing.

If you chose a delayed command, the machine shows “Reserved” on the LCD, indicat-

ing that it has stored the command in memory and will complete it later.

3.53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Programmable one-touch keys

79:

Enter fax number.

Using the power of programmable one-touch keys

In order to complete some operations on your machine, you may have to follow sev-

eral steps and press several different buttons. But programming your machine’s

one-touch keys (79–84) can reduce those many steps to a simple press of a key.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax num-

ber exactly as your machine should dial it,

including whatever codes your phone system

requires. The number can be up to 40 charac-

ters in length.

You can “teach” the one-touch keys to carry out any of the following operations:

Press [En ter ].

Clear

Enter

Com m u n ica tion s fu n ction s:

•

Delayed transmission (explained on page 3.25)

Broadcasting (page 3.24)

Select “Dela yed Tx” and press [En ter ].

Regular polling (not continuous) (pages 3.34–3.35)

Batch transmission (pages 3.26–3.28)

F-Code transmission (page 3.52)

Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:

Delayed Tx

Enter Trnsmit Time

30/17:05

Op tion 1:

Perform the command once at a

certain time on a certain day of

the month. (For example, “Do this

at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)

F-Code polling (pages 3.52–3.53)

Programming a delayed transmission

To program a delayed transmission into a programmable one-touch key:

C.Prog.One-Touch

To select this option, use the

numeric keypad to enter the date

and time when the fax should perform the command.

Clear

Enter

Delayed Tx

Enter Trnsmit Time

00/17:05

Select p-one-touch.(79-84)

Press MENU, C, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the programmable one-touch

number list.

Op tion 2:

Perform the command at a cer-

79:

80:

81:

82:

83:

tain time each day you press the

key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05

PM today.”)

To select this option, use the

numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and

Select the programmable one-touch number

that you want to program or change.

Detail Erase

Enter

Clear

Enter

then the time the fax should perform the command.

Note: If you’re changing a previously stored command:

Press [En ter ], [Exit].

If your previous command for this key was a delayed operation and

you want to keep this key programmed for a delayed operation, use

these instructions to make changes.

The machine will return to step 2.

Note: When the delayed transmission is programmed, the

symbol is

appeared in the programmable one-touch number list on the LCD.

If you want to assign this key to a completely different operation,

overwrite a previously stored command to the new one.

If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, repeat steps 2-9.

If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press

RESET. Your machine returns to standby mode.

Press [En ter ].

3.54

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

If you want the broadcast to begin immediately every time you press the key,

Programming a broadcast / group

Programming a broadcast is very similar to programming a delayed transmission.

But instead of sending to just one phone number, you set up multiple numbers for

the transmission.

press [Exit] and skip to step 9.

If you want to delay the broadcast, select “Dela yed Tx” and press [En ter ].

Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:

To program a broadcast / group into a programmable one-touch key:

Delayed Tx

Enter Trnsmit Time

30/17:05

C.Prog.One-Touch

Select p-one-touch.(79-84)

Press MENU, C, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the programmable one-touch

number list.

Op tion 1:

Perform the command once at a

certain time on a certain day of

the month. (For example, “Do this

at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)

79:

80:

81:

82:

Select the programmable one-touch number

that you want to program or change.

To select this option, use the

numeric keypad to enter the date

83:

Clear

Enter

Detail Erase

Enter

and time when the fax should perform the command.

Delayed Tx

Note: If you’re changing a previously stored command:

Enter Trnsmit Time

00/17:05

Op tion 2:

Perform the command at a cer-

tain time each day you press the

If your previous command for this key was a broadcast / group trans-

mission and you want to keep this key programmed for a broadcast /

group transmission, use these instructions to make changes.

key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05

PM today.”)

If you want to assign this key to a completely different operation,

overwrite a previously stored command to the new one.

To select this option, use the

numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and

then the time the fax should per-

Clear

Enter

Press [En ter ].

form the command.

79:

Enter fax number.

123-4567

01:AABBCC

S001:BBCCDD

G01

Use the numeric keypad to enter up to 330 fax

numbers — you can use any combination of call

groups, one-touch keys, speed-dial numbers and

manually-dialed numbers.

Press [En ter ], [Exit].

The machine will return to step 2.

Note: When the delayed transmission is programmed, the

symbol will

To add more fax numbers, press [Br oadcas]

between each one. If [Br oadcas] is not appeared

on the LCD, press NEXT until it appears.

appear in the programmable one-touch number list on the LCD.

Tone

Pause

Broadcas

If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, repeat steps 2-9.

If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press

RESET. Your machine returns to standby mode.

To enter a speed-dial number, press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX and the number’s

three-digit identifier.

To enter a call group, press [Gr ou p ] and the group’s identifier number.

If [Gr ou p] is not appeared on the LCD, press NEXT until it appears.

Note: If you enter characters by mistake, press [Clea r ] to erase them. Or

press

of the cursor key to select the number then press

[Clea r ].

Press [En ter ].

3.55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Programming regular polling

Note: You cannot program continuous polling into a programmable one-touch key.

Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:

Delayed Tx

Enter Trnsmit Time

30/17:05

For more information on continuous polling, see page 3.35.

Op tion 1:

Perform the command once at a

certain time on a certain day of

the month. (For example, “Do this

at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)

To program a regular polling operation into a programmable one-touch key:

C.Prog.One-Touch

Select p-one-touch.(79-84)

Press MENU, C, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the programmable one-touch

number list.

To select this option, use the

numeric keypad to enter the date

79:

80:

81:

82:

Clear

Enter

and time when the fax should perform the command.

Delayed Tx

Select the programmable one-touch number

that you want to program or change.

83:

Enter Trnsmit Time

00/17:05

Op tion 2:

Perform the command at a cer-

tain time each day you press the

Detail Erase

Enter

key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05

PM today.”)

To select this option, use the

numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and

Note: If you’re changing a previously stored command:

If your previous command for this key was a polling transmission and

you want to keep this key programmed for a polling transmission, use

these instructions to make changes.

Clear

Enter

then the time the fax should per-

form the command.

If you want to assign this key to a completely different operation,

overwrite a previously stored command to the new one.

Press [En ter ], [Exit].

Press [En ter ].

The machine will return to step 2.

79:

Enter fax number.

Note: When regular polling is programmed, the

symbol will appear in

Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax num-

ber exactly as your machine should dial it,

including whatever codes your phone system

requires. The number can be up to 40 charac-

ters in length.

the programmable one-touch number list on the LCD.

Note: When the delayed transmission is programmed, the

symbol will

appear in the programmable one-touch number list on the LCD.

If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, repeat steps 2-10.

If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press

RESET. Your machine returns to standby mode.

Press [En ter ].

Clear

Enter

Select “Pollin g” and press [En ter ].

If you want the polling to begin immediately every time you press the key,

press [Exit] and skip to step 10.

If you want to delay the polling, select “Dela yed Tx” and press [En ter ].

3.56

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Programming a batch transmission

For this operation to work, two things must be true:

Programming an F-Code transmission

For this operation to work, two things must be true:

•

The batch box you’re using must exist on your fax machine.

•

You must know how the remote fax is using each F-Code box to which you’re

transmitting — for example, as a security box or a relay box. Different fax manu-

facturers may use slightly different terms, but the concepts are the same.

To program a batch transmission into a programmable one-touch key:

C.Prog.One-Touch

Select p-one-touch.(79-84)

•

You must know the remote fax’s ITU-T sub-address and password for each box to

which you want to transmit.

Press MENU, C, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the programmable one-touch

number list.

79:

80:

81:

82:

83:

To program an F-Code transmission into a programmable one-touch key:

C.Prog.One-Touch

Select p-one-touch.(79-84)

Select the programmable one-touch number

that you want to program or change.

Press MENU, C, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the programmable one-touch

number list.

79:

80:

81:

82:

83:

Detail Erase

Enter

Note: If you’re changing a previously stored command:

Select the programmable one-touch number

that you want to program or change.

If your previous command for this key was a batch transmission and

you want to keep this key programmed for a batch transmission, use

these instructions to make changes.

Detail

Erase

Enter

Note: If you’re changing a previously stored command:

If you want to assign this key to a completely different operation,

overwrite a previously stored command to the new one.

If your previous command for this key was an F-Code transmission

and you want to keep this key programmed for an F-Code transmis-

sion, use these instructions to make changes.

Press [En ter ].

79:

Enter fax number.

If you want to assign this key to a completely different operation,

overwrite a previously stored command to the new one.

Do n ot enter any numbers and characters

here.

Press [En ter ].

79:

Enter fax number.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax num-

ber exactly as your machine should dial it,

including whatever codes your phone system

requires. The number can be up to 40 charac-

ters in length.

Clear

Enter

Batch Tx

Use cursor to select

batch box.

1:AABBCC

2:BBCCDD

3:FFGGHH

Select the batch box you want to assign to this

programmable one-touch key.

Press [En ter ].

00/17:05

30/17:05

15/14:20

Clear

Enter

Press [En ter ].

Select “F -Cod e Tx” and press [En ter ].

F-Code Tx

The machine will return to step 2.

Enter

Enter sub-address.

SubAddress :

Use the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T sub-

address for the box to which you want to send

the document.

Note: When the batch box transmission is

programmed, the

one-touch number list on the LCD.

and

symbol will appear in the programmable

Password

Press [En ter ].

If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, repeat steps 2-8.

If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press

RESET. Your machine returns to standby mode.

Clear

Enter

3.57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

F-Code Tx

Programming F-Code polling

Enter password.

SubAddress :12345678

Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropri-

ate ITU-T password for the box.

For this operation to work, three things must be true:

•

The document which you’re polling must exist in the remote fax’s F-Code box (ITU-T

standard sub-addressing/password box).

Password

Note: If there isn’t a ITU-T password for this

box, skip to step 10.

•

You must know the remote fax’s ITU-T sub-address and password (if any) for each

box you want to poll.

Press [En ter ].

Clear

Enter

If you want the F-Code transmission to begin

immediately every time you press the key, press [Exit] and skip to step 14.

To program an F-Code polling operating into a programmable one-touch key:

C.Prog.One-Touch

Select p-one-touch.(79-84)

Press MENU, C, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the programmable one-touch

number list.

If you want to delay the F-Code transmission, select “Dela yed Tx” and press

[En ter ].

79:

80:

81:

82:

Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:

Delayed Tx

Select the programmable one-touch number

that you want to program or change.

83:

Enter Trnsmit Time

30/17:05

Op tion 1:

Perform the command once at a

certain time on a certain day of

the month. (For example, “Do this

at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)

Detail

Erase

Enter

Note: If you’re changing a previously stored command:

To select this option, use the

numeric keypad to enter the date

and time when the fax should

perform the command.

If your previous command for this key was an F-Code polling opera-

tion and you want to keep this key programmed for an F-Code polling

operation, use these instructions to make changes.

Clear

Enter

If you want to assign this key to a completely different operation,

overwrite a previously stored command to the new one.

Delayed Tx

Enter Trnsmit Time

00/17:05

Op tion 2:

Perform the command at a cer-

tain time each day you press the

key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05

PM today.”)

To select this option, use the

numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and

then the time the fax should per-

form the command.

Press [En ter ].

79:

Enter fax number.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax num-

ber exactly as your machine should dial it,

including whatever codes your phone system

requires. The number can be up to 40 charac-

ters in length.

Clear

Enter

Press [En ter ].

Press [En ter ], [Exit].

Clear

Enter

Select “F Cod ePollin g” and press [En ter ].

The machine will return to step 2.

Note: When the F-Code transmission is programmed, the

symbol will

FCodePolling

appear in the programmable one-touch number list on the LCD.

Enter sub-address.

SubAddress :

Use the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T sub-

address for the box to which you want to send

the document.

Note: When the delayed transmission is programmed, the

symbol will

appear in the programmable one-touch number list on the LCD.

Password

Press [En ter ].

If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, repeat steps 2-14.

If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press

RESET. Your machine returns to standby mode.

Clear

Enter

3.58

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

F-Code Polling

Erasing a programmable one-touch key

Enter password.

SubAddress :123-4567

Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropri-

ate ITU-T password for the box.

Press MENU, C, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the programmable one-touch number list.

Password

Note: If there isn’t a ITU-T password for this

Select the programmable one-touch key which you want to erase.

box, skip to step 10.

Note: You can select the programmable one-touch key by pressing that key

Press [En ter ].

Clear

Enter

on the control panel.

If you want the F-Code polling to begin immedi-

ately every time you press the key, press [Exit] and skip to step 14.

Note: You can press [Deta il] to see the number which has been pro-

grammed in that key.

C.Prog.One-touch

OK to erase?

If you want to delay the F-Code polling, select “Dela yed Tx” and press

[En ter ].

Press [Er a se]. The LCD shows:

79:123-4567

80:

ing the one-touch number you’ve

81:

Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without eras-

Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:

Delayed Tx

selected, press [Ca n cel]. The fax

will return to step 2.

Enter Trnsmit Time

30/17:05

82:

83:

Op tion 1:

Perform the command once at a

certain time on a certain day of

the month. (For example, “Do this

at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)

Cancel

Erase

Press [Er a se] to erase the programmable one-

touch number.

To select this option, use the

numeric keypad to enter the date

and time when the fax should

perform the command.

To erase another programmable one-touch number, repeat steps 2–4.

Clear

Enter

Or press RESET to return to standby mode.

Delayed Tx

Enter Trnsmit Time

00/17:05

Op tion 2:

Perform the command at a cer-

tain time each day you press the

key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05

PM today.”)

Printing a list of your programmable one-touch keys

You fax machine can print a list of the commands you’ve stored in your programma-

ble one-touch keys.

To select this option, use the

numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and

then the time the fax should per-

form the command.

The list includes:

(1) each key’s one-touch number

(2) the fax/telephone number

(3) when the command should start

(4) which command you’ve selected

(5) if applicable, the selected call group(s) or F-Code box(es) you’ve stored in

the key

Clear

Enter

Press [En ter ], [Exit].

The machine will return to step 2.

(6) the individual settings for each key

Note: When the F-Code transmission is programmed, the

symbol will

appear in the programmable one-touch number list on the LCD.

To print a list of programmable one-touch keys, press MENU, C, [List].

Note: When the delayed transmission is programmed, the

symbol will

appear in the programmable one-touch number list on the LCD.

If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, repeat steps 2-14.

If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press

RESET. Your machine returns to standby mode.

3.59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Fax dialing with programmable one-touch

To dial a fax call using a programmable one-touch number:

Set the document and select resolution and contrast you require.

Press the programmable one-touch key in which you’ve stored the fax commu-

nication command.

Your fax will perform the operation now, or at whatever time you programmed.

Note: To review the details of each operation, review the instructions for that

operation. See page 3.59 for a list of each operation and where to find it.

3.60

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Security features

Your machine has a number of security features to keep your private fax documents

private, avoid unwanted outside communication and even protect against unautho-

rized use of your machine.

Security reception

Security reception tells your machine to keep all received faxes in memory (but not

print them). Then you can print them out later, at your convenience. For example,

you could use this if you’re concerned about workers reading documents intended

for your eyes only.

These security features include: (1) security reception, (2) PIN mask, (3) security

transmission, (4) closed network, (5) block junk fax, and (6) department codes.

Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-

tion as described on left column. You must also know the passcode.

The passcode

Note: In the following instructions, your machine’s LCD shortens the word

Your machine has a passcode protection system which must be turned on in order to

Transmission to Tx and the word Receive to Rx.

use the security features listed above.

To set your machine’s passcode:

Activating security reception

Decide on the four-digit passcode (0001–9999) you want to use. Write it down,

and put it in a safe place.

M.Security Rx

Enter protect passcode.

****

Press MENU, M, [En ter ]. The LCD shows

(see right):

Im p or ta n t: Do not use 0000. This turns off passcode protection.

B.Protect Passcode

Use the numeric keypad to enter the protection

passcode. Here we’ve entered 1234:

Enter old passcode.

****

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set].

Press [En ter ].

Select “B. P r otect Pa sscod e” and then press

[En ter ]. The LCD shows (see right):

Enter

Select “On ”, then press [En ter ].

The LCD shows the machine’s current clock setting:

If you are creating a passcode, use the numeric

keypad to enter 0000.

If you are changing an existing passcode, enter

Enter

M.Security Rx

Enter start time.

15:42

Security Rx:ON

If you want security reception to begin now

(and at this same time every day), skip to step

the existing passcode.

Press [En ter ].

B.Protect Passcode

Enter new passcode.

1234

Otherwise, go on to step 6.

Enter the new four-digit passcode.

For example, we’ve entered 1234:

Use the numeric keypad to enter the time (use

a 24-hour format) when security reception

should begin every day

Enter

Press [En ter ] to save the passcode.

“Type over” the numbers displayed.

Note: Any time you want to turn off the passcode,

To change a digit, move the cursor to that digit, then enter the correct digit.

change the passcode back to 0000 by repeat-

Enter

ing steps 2–7 and entering 0000 in step 6.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

3.61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Printing from security reception / Turning off security reception

When security reception is on, an incoming fax goes directly into your machine’s

memory and the MEMORY RECEIVE light comes on. But the fax has not been printed.

Masking the PIN

To prevent unauthorized long-distance calls, some office telephone systems require

you to enter a personal identification number (PIN) whenever you dial long distance.

To retrieve the faxes received during this security reception (and to return your

machine to normal reception until the next time):

Your fax’s PIN mask feature helps you keep that PIN number private. With the PIN

mask activated, you can dial a fax number plus a PIN, but the PIN will not appear in

a journal, error message printout, delayed command list or a TCR. The PIN may be up

to eight characters in length. It also can include the * or # symbols, and it can be

entered from the numeric keypad.

Press MENU, M, [P r in tDoc].

The LCD shows (see right):

M.Security Rx

Enter protect passcode.

****

There are three possible settings for the PIN mask:

Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode.

•

Off — Turns off the PIN mask feature. Any PIN you enter will appear on any dis-

play or printout which shows the number you dial.

Press [En ter ].

•

If you’ve entered the correct passcode, your

fax machine will print all documents in its

memory and then erase them. Then it will

turn security reception off until the next

time you’ve scheduled security reception.

•

Mode 1 — Each remote fax unit has a departmental PIN access code.

Security Rx will be OFF.

Enter

Mode 2 — Each fax user has a departmental PIN access code.

Note: If you select Mode 1 and you will use a one-touch or speed-dial number, you

must store the remote unit’s PIN access code within that number. However, if

you select Mode 2, this isn’t necessary. (See “Autodialing while using the PIN

mask,” next page for further details.)

•

If you’ve entered an incorrect code, your fax machine will refuse to print,

and security reception remains on.

Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission

(see pages 3.26–3.28), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit

within the appropriate batch box.

Activating the PIN mask

Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-

tion as described on page 3.61. You must also know the passcode.

16.PIN mode

Enter protect passcode.

****

Press MENU, , 1, 6, [En ter ].

The LCD shows (see right):

Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit

passcode.

Note: If you enter an invalid passcode, the

machine’s security feature rejects the

attempt and returns to standby mode.

Enter

16.PIN mode

Use cursor to select

desired mode.

OFF

Mode1

Mode2

Press [En ter ].

Select desired mode.

Press [En ter ].

Enter

Press RESET to return to standby mode.

3.62

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

If you chose “Mode 2” — as you autodial, load the code

Autodialing while using the PIN mask

In this mode, you don’t have to add the PIN to the autodialer setting. Instead, you

enter the PIN manually each time you autodial:

Note: The following instructions presume you understand how to set and use your

machine’s autodialer. If you need to review, see pages 3.11–3.23.

Dial the number as you normally would, using the autodialer.

If you chose “Mode 1” — the PIN goes in

Transmission

Enter PIN.

In Mode 1, before autodialing a number for the first time, you must add the PIN to

the stored one-touch key or speed-dial number. Here’s how:

Use the numeric keypad to enter the PIN.

01:123-4567

Use cursor to select

item.

Location:AABBCC

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:1,5

01:AABBCC

Press [En ter ].

Begin by creating or changing an entry in the

autodialer. (See pages 3.11–3.23, if necessary.)

While you’re setting this up, the machine asks

Your machine dials the number.

Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will

you to enter the PIN. The LCD shows:

Clear

Enter

be using batch transmission (see pages

Select “P IN” and press [En ter ].

3.26–3.28), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit within the

appropriate batch box. (See “Performing batch transmission while using the

PIN mask,” page 3.64.)

Exit

Enter

Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit

passcode.

01:123-4567

Enter PIN

Location:AABBCC

Alt.No. :

GroupNo.:1,5

Dialing from the numeric keypad while using the PIN mask

Press [En ter ].

If you’ve specified Mode 1 — use “star” power

Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired

PIN, up to eight characters in length.

Transmission

Press START.

19725550911*12345678

Enter the phone number, then press the

* (“star”) key and enter the PIN.

Press [En ter ] to save the PIN.

The PIN always goes last.

For example, to dial 19725550911 with a PIN of

“12345678”, enter 19725550911*12345678:

Clear

Enter

Note: If you press [En ter ] without entering

the PIN, the machine beeps, indicates “Invalid Number” on the LCD and

then returns to step 5.

Press START. The PIN disappears from the dis-

play, and your machine dials the desired phone

number.

Group

Clear

Broadcas

Now you may autodial the number as usual.

Im p or ta n t: While in PIN Mode 1, any autodialer numbers you use must include

the PIN. This also applies to autodialer numbers used with batch

transmission (see pages 3.26–3.28) or programmable one-touch keys

(see pages 3.54–3.60).

If you’ve specified Mode 2 — the machine guides you

Transmission

Enter PIN.

123-4567

Enter the phone number as usual.

Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission,

you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit within the appropri-

ate batch box. (See “Performing batch transmission while using the PIN

mask,” page 3.64.)

Press START. The LCD shows:

Use the numeric keypad to enter the PIN.

Clear

Enter

Press [En ter ].

Your machine dials the number.

3.63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Performing batch transmission while using the PIN mask

Setting security transmission

Note: The following instructions presume you are familiar with how to set and use

both your machine’s autodialer and its batch transmission feature. If you

need to review, see pages 3.11–3.23 for more on the autodialer and/or pages

3.26–3.28 for more on batch transmission.

Your fax’s security transmission feature provides extra assurance that your documents

go where you’re sending them. When this feature is activated and your machine sends a

fax, the machine compares the last four digits of the dialed number to the other unit’s

Subscriber ID (the phone number at the top of that unit’s transmissions). If these digits

match, your call goes through. If they don’t, your machine disconnects the call and

prints an error message telling you to check the condition of the remote unit.

If you’ve specified Mode 1 or Mode 2

Im p or ta n t: Any autodialer number you use with batch transmission must include

the PIN. (To review how to include this information in an autodialer

number, review the Mode 1 instructions under “Autodialing while

using the PIN mask,” page 3.63.)

Before sending a batch transmission the first time, you must store the PIN within its

batch box. Here’s how:

Before you activate this feature, consider:

•

Not all fax machine owners enter their phone numbers in their Subscriber IDs. —

Indeed, some machines don’t even have a Subscriber ID. So, with security trans-

mission activated, your machine would disconnect its calls to such machines.

•

Access codes can cause confusion. — If an autodialer entry ends with a long-distance

or other access codes, activating this feature prevents calls to that fax.

Enter fax number.

1234*1234567

Note: In the following instructions, your fax’s LCD abbreviates Transmission as Tx.

10.Security Tx

Follow the steps for creating or modifying a

batch box (page 3.26).

The LCD asks for the fax number (here, we’re

working with batch box 1):

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

Press MENU, , 1, 0, [En ter ].

Tx Time :

OFF

Select desired setting.

Enter an autodialer number, or use the numeric

keypad to enter the fax number, to which the

batch transmission should go.

Clear

Enter

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Enter

Im p or ta n t: If you’re entering a number from the numeric keypad, enter the

fax number, followed by the * (“star”) key and then the PIN.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Note: If you press [En ter ] without entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,

indicates “No PIN Number” on the LCD and then returns you to step 2.

Continue with the steps for creating or modifying a batch box (page 3.26).

Now you can perform batch transmission to this box while the PIN mask is activated.

3.64

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

Setting for use with a closed network

For maximum communications security, use a closed network. This limits your

machine to only communicating with other Muratec fax machines which can “pre-

sent” the proper passcode.

Setting Block Junk Fax

Your fax machine’s Block J unk Fax feature lets you bar the gates against unautho-

rized incoming faxes (“junk fax”). But before you block junk fax, first understand

how this feature works, to determine if it’s right for you. There are four possible set-

tings for Block Junk Fax:

Im p or ta n t: The passcode you use for closed network operation is n ot the same as

•

Off — The feature isn’t activated.

the protection passcode.

Once your machine is set up for a closed network, your machine will disconnect calls

coming in from fax machines other than Muratec fax machines.

Mode1 — Your fax machine checks whether the last four digits of any phone

number in your autodialer matches the last four digits of the remote fax’s sub-

scriber ID (the phone number part of the TTI). If it doesn’t find a match, your

machine disconnects the call.

To set your fax machine’s closed network password:

Decide on the four-digit closed network passcode (0001–9999) you want to use.

Wr ite it down , and put it in a safe place.

•

Mode2 — This mode rejects any call from a number whose last eight digits

match any number in the blocked numbers list (explained later). Your machine

can hold up to 30 blocked numbers.

08.Passcode

Enter the passcode.

0000

Passcode :0000

Press MENU, , 0, 8, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the current code:

Mode3 — This rejects numbers that are not in the autodialer and also rejects num-

bers that are in the blocked numbers list. This lets you keep a number on your

autodialer for transmission to it, while still blocking its incoming calls by putting

it in the blocked numbers list.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired

four-digit closed network passcode.

But before you activate the Block Junk Fax feature, please consider:

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Enter

•

Not all fax machine owners enter their phone numbers in their Subscriber IDs. —

With Block Junk Fax activated, your machine would reject faxes from these

machines.

Note: To turn off the closed network passcode and return to normal fax reception,

change the code to 0000 by repeating steps 1–4 and entering 0000 in step 3.

•

Access codes can cause confusion. — If an autodialer entry ends with extra codes,

such as long-distance codes, Block Junk Fax will block out calls from those faxes.

To set your fax machine to operate in a closed network:

09.Closed Network

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

To set Block Junk Fax:

Press MENU, , 0, 9, [En ter ].

The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:

11.Block Junk Fax

Use cursor to select

desired mode.

Press MENU, , 1, 1, [En ter ].

The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:

Select desired mode.

OFF

Mode1

Mode2

Mode3

Select desired mode.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Enter

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

What you do next depends on what you selected

in step 2:

Enter

•

If you selected Off or Mode1, press RESET to return to standby mode.

If you selected either Mode2 or Mode3, go on to step 4.

3.65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

11.Block Junk Fax

Enter fax number.

The LCD now shows blocked numbers list.

If you want to enter or erase a number, go on to

step 5.

Otherwise, press [En ter ] and skip to step 7.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the last eight

characters of a fax number you want to block.

Clear

Enter

For example, if you want to block a fax from someone with a Subscriber ID of

972-555-3038, you should enter 5, 5, 5, [–], 3, 0, 3, 8.

If you want to erase an existing entry in the blocked numbers list, press

of the cursor key to select the number then press [Clea r ].

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Press RESET to return to the standby mode.

Printing a list of blocked numbers list

To print a list of blocked numbers list, press MENU, , 1, 1, [List].

3.66

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced fax

This page intentionally blank.

3.67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the default fax settings

Settings for transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69

Settings for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72

Settings for dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.75

Settings for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.76

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax settings

Settings for transmission

Scan settings

Defa u lt settin g: Primary resolution: Normal, Primary contrast: Normal

Setting ECM

Defa u lt settin g: ON.

Four different settings tell your machine how to scan documents. The initial factory

settings are probably right for most applications, so try using them before changing

any of these settings:

“Line noise,” or static on the line during a call, can easily disrupt the flow of data

from one fax machine to another.

That’s why your fax machine gives you the option of using the Error Correction

Mode (ECM). When two fax machines communicate while running in ECM, the send-

ing machine automatically checks the data as it sends. If the receiving fax machine

can’t verify the transmission, the first machine will re-send it as necessary.

•

P r im a r y r esolu tion m od e — Sets the resolution for your documents. Choose

either normal, fine, superfine (“S-Fine” on the LCD) or grayscale mode (“Gray”).

•

P r im a r y con tr a st m od e — Sets how light or dark you want faxed documents

to be when they arrive at their destination.

Note: ECM gives you a better chance of transmitting a fax document over a bad

phone line, but it could also slow down the transmission time. And the worse

the line is, the slower the transmission. That’s why the machine lets you

turn ECM on or off as needed.

Note: The primary settings you choose effect your fax activity only.

To set these modes:

01.Scan Settings

Use cursor to select

item.

Resol. :Normal

Note: Not all fax machines have ECM. If you’ve activated ECM and then transmit to

a fax machine not currently using ECM, there will be no change in the fax

transmission from a usual, non-ECM transmission.

Press MENU, , 0, 1, [En ter ].

To set the primary resolution mode, select

“Resol.” then press [En ter ].

Contrast:Normal

07.ECM Mode

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

Select desired resolution mode, then press

[En ter ].

Press MENU, , 0, 7, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the current ECM setting:

Exit

Enter

OFF

To set the primary contrast mode, select

“Con tr a st” then press [En ter ].

Select “On ” or “Off” using the cursor key.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Select desired contrast mode using a cursor key, then press [En ter ].

Press [Exit] to exit this setting mode.

Enter

Press RESET to return to the standby mode.

By following the steps above, you’ve set your defaults for scanning. Before sending

documents, you can “override” these default scan settings for that transmission.

To override the default resolution and contrast settings before sending a document:

•

Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.

Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.

Once your document is transmitted, your machine returns to its default settings.

3.69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax settings

Memory transmission

Defa u lt settin g: ON.

Quick Memory transmission

Defa u lt settin g: ON.

Your fax machine has a great memory! Take advantage of it, and you could:

Using Quick Memory transmission can save you time over standard memory trans-

missions.

Sa ve Tim e. By using your fax machine’s memory, you won’t have to wait for your

machine while it completes the transmission. Simply scan your document into your

fax machine’s memory, and you can walk away with your original in hand.

For a normal memory transmission, your fax: (1) scans your entire document into

memory, (2) dials the other fax machine, then (3) transmits the document.

Sa ve Mon ey. If you’re transmitting to another memory-equipped fax machine, your

machine will send the document directly into the other machine’s memory and hang

up. (The receiving machine then prints out your message from its memory after the

call has ended.) This cuts your actual on-line time to a minimum.

But with Quick Memory transmission, your machine doesn’t wait to scan all pages

into memory before dialing. After it scans the first page of your document, your

machine dials the call. While dialing, connecting and transmitting, your fax

machine continues to scan in the remaining pages of the document.

Sa ve Even Mor e Mon ey. Set up a delayed command (see page 3.25) to send your

document after hours, and you can save more money, because the line charges will

be cheaper.

You can set your fax to always use Quick Memory transmission as the default.

Im p or ta n t: Your fax machine’s memory transmission feature must be turned on

to use Quick Memory transmission (see left column).

The default transmission mode when the machine is turned on or when modes are

cleared is memory transmission. You can change this setting, see below.

To make Quick Memory transmission the default:

18.Quick Memory Tx

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

Note: Whether you decide to send your documents from memory or manually, you

can override that choice one transmission at a time by pressing

MEMORY TRANSMIT before you send your document. After completing the

communication, your fax will return to the default setting.

Press MENU, , 1, 8, [En ter ]. The LCD shows:

Select “On” using the cursor key.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Note: Some documents use up memory more quickly than others. They include

documents with many pages and those with many dark areas. When the

machine’s memory is full, it can transmit only through the document feeder.

Enter

Note: When you use the flatbed scanner, the machine always uses memory trans-

mission.

To change the default setting of memory transmission:

13.Memory Tx

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

Press MENU, , 1, 3, [En ter ].

OFF

Select desired setting using the cursor key.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Enter

If the MEMORY TRANSMIT light glows, memory transmission is on.

If the MEMORY TRANSMIT light doesn’t glow, memory transmission is off.

3.70

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax settings

Image rotate transmission

Defa u lt settin g: ON.

When this feature is activated, if you set letter-sized document in the sideways

direction( ), the image will be sent rotated by 90°.

03.Image Rotate Tx

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

Press MENU, , 0, 3, [En ter ].

Choose desired setting you want using the cur-

sor key. Then press [En ter ].

Press RESET to return to the standby mode.

Enter

Setting the confirmation stamp

Defa u lt settin g: OFF.

You can set your fax machine so that it will automatically place a small blue ink

stamp mark on the front of each original document that it successfully scans.

Im p or ta n t: Turn off this feature if you’re sending documents you don’t want the

fax to stamp.

14.Stamp

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

Press MENU, , 1, 4, [En ter ].

The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:

OFF

Select “On ” or “Off” using the cursor key.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Enter

Press RESET to return to the standby mode.

3.71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax settings

Settings for reception

Reduction margin

Your fax machine’s reduction margin is measured in millimeters (mm). We’ll define

reduction margin by explaining how it’s used:

Print settings

You can set three parameters for printing received fax messages:

•

Print reduction rate

Reduction margin

Paper save function

When a fax message enters your machine’s electronic brain, the machine measures

the message’s length and compares it to (a ) the length of your selected paper p lu s

(b) the reduction margin you set. If the length of the incoming message is shorter

than (a ) and (b) put together, your machine prints the message on just one sheet.

If it’s longer, your machine prints the message on more than one sheet.

You set all three in the same procedure, discussed on next page. Following is a

explanation for each:

Note: An Auto reduction setting and a reduction margin setting of 40mm will

print most incoming faxes as single pages. Try this combination first and

then, only if you have problems with it, select different settings.

Print reduction rate

Print reduction lets you set the machine to reduce large incoming documents to a

size that fits the paper in your machine. (This setting doesn’t affect copies you may

make with your machine.)

Paper save function

There are two methods of paper save function, Half-page reception and duplex recep-

tion.

Below are the options for both the print reduction and copy reduction settings:

Half-page reception

Settin g

Au to

Wh a t it d oes

Half-page reception can conserve paper if some of the faxes you receive are half-

page, “memo-sized” messages. When activated, this feature tells the machine to

combine two of these half-page receptions onto a single sheet. Half-page reception

only combines half-page messages sent back-to-back during the same transmission.

It won’t combine two half-page faxes from separate transmissions.

Automatically reduces printouts at variable rates down to a

minimum of 50%. Tries to reduce printout to fit on one sheet of

your selected paper size. If it can’t, print the image at 100% size

on two or more pages.

Does not reduce document. (Due to the sender’s TTI, this may print

two pages when receiving a one-page fax document. See 97%,below.)

Duplex reception (Optional duplex unit is required.)

100%

97%

With the optional duplex unit installed, received fax message can be printed on both

sides of the recording paper.

Reduces an original so that the final printout of a one-page-

document (if the original isn’t larger than the paper in your

machine) will only be one page long, even with the TTI.

Note: This feature works only when all the pages of received documents have the

same width.

91%

81%

Reduces documents slightly more.

Reduces documents even more. Helpful for some international

stationery sizes, as well as special applications.

Turns legal-sized originals into letter-sized printed copies.

75%

3.72

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax settings

Adjusting the print settings

Defa u lt settin g: Rx reduction rate: Normal, Reduction margin: 40 mm,

Setting ECM

Defa u lt settin g: ON.

Paper saving:OFF.

“Line noise,” or static on the line during a call, can easily disrupt the flow of data

from one fax machine to another.

02.Print Settings

Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, , 0, 2, [En ter ].

That’s why your fax machine gives you the option of using Error Correction Mode

(ECM). When two fax machines communicate while running in ECM, the sending

machine automatically checks the data as it sends. If the receiving fax machine can’t

verify the transmission, the first machine will re-send it as necessary.

Rx Reduc.Rate:Normal

Reduc. Margin:40 mm

Paper Saving :OFF

Select item you want to set using the cursor

key. Then press [En ter ].

Select desired item and then press [En ter ].

Exit

Enter

Note: ECM gives you a better chance of transmitting a fax document over a bad

phone line, but it could also slow down the transmission time. And the worse

the line is, the slower the transmission. That’s why the machine lets you

turn ECM on or off as needed.

If you want to change other items, repeat step

2-3.

When you finish, press [Exit].

Note: Not all fax machines have ECM. If you’ve activated ECM and then transmit to

a fax machine not currently using ECM, there will be no change in the fax

transmission from a usual, non-ECM transmission.

Press RESET to return to the standby mode.

07.ECM Mode

Setting the number of rings

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

Press MENU, , 0, 7, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the current ECM setting:

Defa u lt settin g: 2 time.

OFF

Select “On” or “Off” using the cursor key.

You can set how many times your fax machine will ring before answering a call.

Choose from 1 to 10 rings.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

05.Number of Rings

Set # of rings.

02 time.

# Of Rings : 2 time(01-10)

Enter

(01-10)

Press MENU, , 0, 5, [En ter ]. The LCD shows:

Press RESET to return to the standby mode.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of

rings you want, from 01 to 10.

Note: If you enter 00 (zero), the machine will

beep briefly to warn you that it can’t

accept that setting.

Enter

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Press RESET to return to the standby mode.

3.73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax settings

Cassette for fax reception

Defa u lt settin g: 1st cassette: ON, 2nd cassette: ON

If you do not want to use certain cassette for fax reception, set it to OFF.

23.Cassette for Rx

1st Cassette

2nd Cassette

Use cursor to select

cassette.

Press MENU, , 2, 3, [En ter ].

:ON

Select the cassette you want to set using the

cursor key and then press [En ter ].

Exit

Enter

23.Cassette for Rx

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

Select “ON” or “OFF” using the cursor key.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

If you want to set other cassette, repeat step

2–4.

Enter

To finish, press [Exit].

Press RESET to return to the standby mode.

3.74

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax settings

Settings for dialing

Changing the dialing pause length

Defa u lt settin g: 2 sec.

Changing redial settings

Defa u lt settin g: Number of redial: 2 times, Redial interval: 1 minute.

The pause is set by the factory to last two seconds, but you can set it to last as long

as ten seconds if necessary. To change the pause length:

It’s up to you how many times the fax redials a number and how long it waits

between redials (that length of time between calls is the redial interval).

To program the redial settings:

04.Dialing Pause

Set dialing pause. (02-10)

02 sec.

Press MENU,

, 0, 4, [En ter ].

06.Number of Redials

Set # of redials. (02-15)

02 time.

Time : 2 time.(02-15)

Interval : 1 min. (1-5)

Press MENU, , 0, 6, [En ter ].

PauseTime: 2 sec. (02-10)

Use the numeric keypad to enter the length you

want for the dialing pause.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of

redials you want. Choose from 2 to 15 redials.

Note: The length setting requires two digits.

Always enter a leading zero for lengths

less than 10 seconds.

Note: Enter a leading zero when entering a

Enter

quantity less than 10.

Enter

Press ENTER to save the setting.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

06.Number of Redials

Set redial interval. (1-5)

1 min.

Time : 2 time (02-15)

Interval : 1 min. (1-5)

Use the numeric keypad to enter the length you

want between redial attempts. Choose from 1 to

5 minutes.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Press RESET to return to standby mode.

Enter

3.75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax settings

Settings for operation

Adjust the monitor speaker’s volume

Printing your fax settings

After you’ve programmed settings into your machine, print a fax settings list.

We recommend this, particularly if you’re sharing the machine with other users,

who might change the settings.

Defa u lt settin g: Medium.

You can set the volume of the monitor speaker, assuring that on-hook dialing will be

as loud (or as soft) as you require.

With this list, you can quickly confirm that all of your settings are correct, without

having to go back and check them on the machine. Or, if you do need to undo

someone else’s changes, this list guides you in returning the machine to your

preferred settings.

Press MONITOR/CALL on the control panel. You now should hear a dial tone.

Im p or ta n t: If you don’t hear a dial tone, make sure your fax machine is

plugged into a working phone line.

Note: Please refer to the index at the end of these instructions to locate any

settings you don’t recognize or understand.

To print the settings list:

If the volume you hear is satisfactory, skip to step 4.

Otherwise, proceed to step 3.

Tel Mode

Use cursor to adjust

monitor volume.

Adjust the volume as you wish:

If the machine is in Fax mode, proceed to step 2.

If it is in Copy mode, press F AX to change to Fax mode.

To turn the volume up, press

To turns the volume down, press

Volume Setting

OFF Low Medium Loud

-----------------------

Press MENU, , [List].

The LCD indicates the volume.

Enter

Printing a program list

Press MONITOR/CALL again to hang up.

Your machine can also print a program list. This lists the functions available on your

fax machine and the keystrokes needed to complete them.

Panel auto reset time

Note: Default: After three minutes

Note: Please refer to the index at the end of these instructions to locate any

settings you don’t recognize or understand.

To print a program list, press MENU, *, 8.

The machine returns to its initial condition automatically after a certain period of

time. You can change this time from 1 to 10 minutes.

Note: The machine first resets the LCD display, and after certain period of time it

resets the key settings to the initial condition.

Press MENU, , 1, 7, [En ter ].

17.Fax Panel Reset

Fax Panel Reset

After 03 min.

(1-10)

Enter the time to auto resetting, and then

press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Fax Panel Reset : 3 min.

Press RESET to return to standby.

Enter

3.76

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax settings

This page intentionally blank.

3.77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1

Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3

Machine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

Soft Keys

Soft Keys are shortcut keys. You can program the soft keys on the control panel to

turn on or off any function with just the touch of a button. Your machine has four

Soft Keys. If the light above any one of these keys glows, that means the setting

programmed into that key is active.

•

Enhanced copy (DocEnhance) — Makes only the light areas, such as the text

written with pencil, darken selectively.

•

Duplex (see page 2.19)

Booklet (see page 2.23)

These keys are programmed at the factory to turn the following functions on or off:

* When you change the setting by using the Soft Key, it will be available only for

the next transmission. Once that transmission is complete, your machine returns

to its default setting.

•

Confirmation stamp* (see page 3.71)

Confirmation report* (see pages 3.40–3.41)

Monitor/Call* (see page 3.5)

Memory transmission* (see pages 3.3 and 3.70)

Setting the Soft Key

But instead of using the Soft Keys to control the functions above, you can program

them to turn other functions on or off. These functions are:

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set].

D.Soft Key

Press Soft Key

Select “D.Soft Key” using the cursor key, and

then press [En ter ].

•

TTI Tx*— Normally, when you send the fax message, your TTI will be printed at

the top of document you send. If you programmed TTI Tx into a Soft Key, you can

disable to send your TTI by simply pressing that Soft Key.

1.Stamp

FaxFunc.

The LCD shows the function name currently

stored in the Soft key 1.

•

Cover page* (see page 3.38)

Flash* — Lets you quickly disconnect a call and go right to the next one without

having to hang up the handset.

Note: If you want to see the all four functions

Exit Show All Enter

currently stored in the soft keys, press

[Sh ow All]. However, when you register the other function in the Soft

Key, you should press [Sh ow All] again to select the Soft Key.

•

Security reception (see pages 3.61–3.62)

Auto reception (see page 3.7)

Fax Forwarding (see pages 3.36–3.37)

Combine (see page 2.10)

Press desired Soft Key (1–4) on the control panel you want to change. Then

press [En ter ].

Repeat (see page 2.11)

Note: On the LCD, the shaded functions are currently assigned to the Soft

keys.

Series copy (see page 2.13)

Erase Center (see page 2.13)

Erase Border (see page 2.14)

TopUp Copy (see page 2.14)

Binding Margin (see page 2.15)

Directional Magnification (see page 2.15)

Nega/Posi (see page 2.16)

1.Stamp

Use cursor to select

item.

Stamp

FaxFunc.

1.Stamp

Use cursor to select

item.

Combine

Repeat

FaxFunc.

Cover Page

Flash

Margin

D.Mag.

Report

Monitor/Call

Memory Tx

TTI Tx

Security Rx

Auto Rx

Fax Forward

Series Copy Nega/Posi

EraseBorder Last Job

EraseCenter TopUp Copy

CopyFunc Cancel Enter

FaxFunc. Cancel

Enter

Last Job (see page 2.17)

Mixed length copy (see page 2.18)

4.1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

Select the function you want to assign to the Soft Key using the cursor key.

Press [CopyFunc] or [FaxFunc.] to see other functions, If you need.

Note: “Book let” will appears only when the optional duplex unit is

attached.

Press [En ter ].

If you want to set another Soft Key, go back to step 3.

If you do not want to set any more Soft Keys, press [Exit] or RESET to finish.

Now you can use the labels included in your machine’s original packaging to label

the Soft Key function you just set.

4.2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

Macros

In order to complete some operations on your machine, you may have to follow sev-

eral steps and press several different buttons. But programming your machine’s

Macro keys (M1 – M6) can reduce those many steps to a simple press of a key. You

can “teach” the Macro keys to carry out any of the following jobs:

Docu m en t stor a ge:

•

Regular polling documents (see page 3.35)

F-Code Box (bulletin box) documents (see page 3.50)

Com m u n ica tion s fu n ction s:

Note: One Macro key can hold only one job. It cannot combine two or more jobs.

•

Delayed transmission (see page 3.25)

Regular polling (see pages 3.34–3.35)

Continuous polling (see page 3.35)

Batch transmission (see page 3.27)

F-Code transmission (see page 3.52)

F-Code polling (see pages 3.52–3.53)

Copy:

•

All Copy settings (see “Copy Features”).

P r in tou ts:

One-touch numbers list (see page 3.16)

•

Speed-dial numbers list (see page 3.20)

Programmable one-touch numbers list (see page 3.59)

Delayed commands list (see page 3.30)

Programming the Macro key

Activity journal (see page 3.40)

Macros

Select macro key

Call group directory (see page 3.23)

Press MACRO P ROGRAM. The LCD shows Macro

key list.

Machine settings list (see page 4.10)

M01:Not stored

M02:Not stored

M03:Not stored

M04:Not stored

M05:Not stored

Sample cover page (see page 3.38)

Note: The LCD can show the Macro name up to

19 characters. If you want to view the

Macro name longer than 19 characters,

press [Detail] after program it.

Department code list for fax (see page 4.15)

Department code list for copy (see pages 4.15–4.16)

Batch box list (see page 3.27)

Detail

Enter

Action

List of stored batch documents (see page 3.28)

List of transfer pattern for Fax forwarding (see page 3.36)

List of F-Code boxes (see page 3.49)

Select the Macro key (M1 – M6) you want to pro-

gram or change.

If you want to overwrite only the Macro name, press NEXT twice, [Ch g.Titl]

and then go to step 9.

List of documents stored in F-Code boxes (see page 3.49)

Regular polling documents (see page 3.36)

Delayed commands documents (see page 3.30)

Security receive documents (see page 3.62)

Batch transmission documents (see page 3.28)

F-Code Box (bulletin box) documents (see page 3.50)

Press [En ter ].

If you chose the Macro key already programmed, proceed to step 4.

Otherwise, skip to step 5.

4.3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

Macros

Title

The LCD shows:

Upper case

The machine now asks you to name this job.

Enter the name of this job.

A job’s name may be up to 130 characters in

length.

Macros

Over Write?

If you want to overwrite the operation already

programmed, press [Yes].

M1:AABBCC

M2:BBCCDD

M3:EEFFGG

M4:Not Stored

M5:Not Stored

If you do not want to overwrite the key you

have chosen, press [No] and go back to step 2.

If you do not want to enter or change this job’s

name, skip to step 10.

Chara.

Clear

Enter

Yes

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

The machine will return to standby mode.

To program or modify another job, repeat steps 1–10.

Set

Copy Ready

100%

The LCD of copy standby mode appears, which

means the machine is ready to register the

steps into the Macro key.

Erasing a Macro key

Macros

Select macro key.

Note: It keeps beeping and blinking the COP Y

or F AX key during the job registration in

order to make notice of the registration

mode.

Press MACRO P ROGRAM, NEXT.

M01:AABBCC

M02:BBCCDD

M03:EEFFGG

M04:Not stored

M05:Not stored

Paper

Zoom

Sort

Select the Macro key (M1 – M6) you want to

erase.

Press the keys exactly as you operate the job you want to program into the

Macro key.

Setting

Erase

List

Note: If you want to program the fax function, first press F AX. Or, if you

want to program the copier function, first press COP Y.

Macros

OK to erase?

Note: You can program up to 60 steps. When it comes over 60 steps, your fax

machine asks if you register the operations you have entered. If you

want to register them, press [Yes]. If not, press [No].

Press [Er a se]. The LCD shows:

M01:AABBCC

M02:BBCCDD

M03:EEFFGG

M04:Not stored

M05:Not stored

Note: If you want to quit without erasing the

Macro key you’ve selected, press

Note: If you want to cancel the operations you have set, press RESET and

[Ca n cel]. The fax will return to step 2.

then go back to step 1.

Press [Er a se] again to erase the job.

If you programmed Sta r t or [En ter ] into the operation, proceed to step 8.

Otherwise, press MACRO P ROGRAM and skip to step 9.

Cancel

Erase

To erase another Macro key, repeat steps 2–4. Or press RESET to return to standby

Macros

Include Start/Enter?

mode.

If you want to start immediately after pressing

the Macro key when you use it, press [Yes]. If

not, press [No].

Printing a list of your Macro keys

Your fax machine can print a list of the commands you’ve stored in your Macro

keys.

Note: If you want to confirm the settings or

operations in the Macro key before the

machine do it, press [No] here.

Yes

The list includes:

(1) each key’s Macro key number

(2) the name of the job stored in the Macro key

To print a list of Macro keys, press MACRO P ROGRAM, NEXT, [List].

4.4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

Setting the speed for Macros

You can adjust the speed of one step in the Macro key.

Macros

Use cursor to select

Macro speed.

Very Fast

Fast

Normal

Slow

Press MACRO P ROGRAM, NEXT, [Settin g].

Select desired speed for Macros using the cur-

sor key.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Enter

Copying or fax dialing with the Macro key

To copy or dial a fax call using a Macro key:

Insert the document.

Select resolution and contrast.

Press the Macro key in which you’ve stored the command.

Note: You can also select the command from the Macro key list:

Press MACRO P ROGRAM. Select the command using the cursor key.

Then press [Action ].

Press START, if you have not registered START in the Macro key.

The programmed command will start.

4.5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

Machine settings

Accessing the machine setting mode

You can change or set the default of your machine settings.

A. Confirm the Counter for total printed pages

You can confirm the total number of pages you have printed.

Note: Regarding the changing of the copy settings, see pages 2.25–2.30.

Note: Regarding the changing of the fax settings, see pages 3.69–3.76.

Note: It can be different from the number on the optional page counter.

Machine Settings

Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set].

To access the machine settings:

A.Page Counter

B.Protect Passcode

C.Copy Protect

D.Soft Key

Press MENU.

Select “A. Pa ge Cou n ter ” using the cursor

key. Then press [En ter ].

Press [Ma ch Set].

E.Sleep Mode

Enter

Machine Settings

Use cursor to select

item.

A.Page Counter

The LCD shows the total number of pages.

Total Print Pages 01234567

A.Page Counter

B.Protect Passcode

C.Copy Protect

D.Soft Key

Note: Pressing RESET, the machine returns to

standby mode.

E.Sleep Mode

Enter

B. Protect passcode

When you use the security reception or the department code protect, you need to set

the protect passcode in the machine setting. Regarding the setting of the protect

passcode, see “The passcode” on page 3.61.

Select the desired settings using the cursor key, and then press [En ter ].

Change the settings as you want.

Then, press [Exit].

4.6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

C. Copy protect

E. Sleep mode

Your machine is initially set to be in the Sleep mode automatically when 15 minutes

has passed after you pressed a key. If you want to change the time or to set the

Sleep mode to OFF, you can set it here.

You can set your machine to not use the copy functions. When you set the copy pro-

tect to ON, the machine will not change to the copy mode even if you press COP Y.

Note: If it is set to ON, the Fax & Copy feature (see page 3.34) and the setting of

the paper size are also not available.

Note: Pressing ENERGY SAVING, your machine will be in the Sleep mode immedi-

ately, regardless of this setting.

Machine Settings

A.Page Counter

B.Protect Passcode

C.Copy Protect

D.Soft Key

Use cursor to select

item.

Machine Settings

A.Page Counter

B.Protect Passcode

C.Copy Protect

D.Soft Key

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set].

Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set].

Select “C. Cop y P r otect” using the cursor key.

Then press [En ter ].

Select “E. Sleep Mod e” using the cursor key.

Then press [En ter ].

E.Sleep Mode

Enter

Select “ON” or “OF F ” using the cursor key. Then press [En ter ].

Select “ON” or “OF F ” using the cursor key.

Then press [En ter ].

Note: ON:

The copy function is not available.

OFF: The copy function is available.

Note: If you set the Sleep mode to OFF, the Auto power off mode will be also

OFF and your machine will return to standby mode.

E.Sleep Mode

Enter start time. (1-100)

After 015 min.

D. Soft Key

Enter the time for the Sleep mode using

numeric keypad. (1 - 100 min.)

In the initial setting, the following functions are registered in the Soft keys; memory

transmission, transmission confirmation stamp, confirmation report and hook/call

request. When you want to set another function into the Soft key, you should set it

in the machine setting. Regarding the setting of the Soft key, see “Soft Key” on page

4.1.

Note: Your machine will be in the Sleep mode

when the time you set has passed after

you pressed any key last.

Enter

Press [En ter ].

4.7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

F. Auto power off mode

Your machine is initially set to be in the Auto power off mode automatically when

the machine keeps to be in the Sleep mode for 60 minutes. If you want to change the

time or to set the Auto power off mode to OFF, you can set it here.

G. Adjust the sound settings

You can adjust or change the following sounds:

•

Fa x Rin ger — If you set this to “ON”, the ringer that alerts you when you

receive a fax will be active even if you do not have the optional handset.

Note: Pressing ENERGY SAVING for 3 seconds, your machine will be in the Auto

Note: This setting is not available in Fax/Tel ready mode.

power off mode immediately, regardless of this setting.

•

Volu m e — You can adjust the volume for fax ringer, alarm, key touch tone and

complete beep.

Machine Settings

Use cursor to select

item.

Key Tou ch Ton e — You can select the key touch tone for each mode, fax mode

and copy mode.

Note: When the optional scanner kit or network kit are installed to your

machine, you can also select the tones for them.

Com p lete Beep — You can select the type of beep that alerts you when copy

printing, fax transmission/reception or fax printing were completed.

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set].

F.Auto Power Off Mode

G.Sound Settings

H.Paper for List

J.Print Machine Setting

L.Print Stored Doc. List

Select “F. Au to Pow er Off Mod e” using the

cursor key. Then press [En ter ].

•

Enter

Pa p er J a m Ala r m — If you set this to “OFF”, your machine will not sound an

alarm when the paper jam occurs.

Note: The alarm light will glow and the LCD will show the error message,

Select “ON” or “OF F ” using the cursor key.

Then press [En ter ].

regardless of this setting.

Note: If you set it to OFF, your machine will return to standby mode.

Machine Settings

F.Auto Power Off Mode

G.Sound Settings

H.Paper for List

F.Auto Power Off Mode

Enter start time. (30-120)

After 060 min.

Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set].

Enter the time for the Auto power off mode

using numeric keypad.

(30 - 120 min.)

Select “G. Sou n d Settin gs” using the cursor

key. Then press [En ter ].

J.Print Machine Setting

L.Print Stored Doc. List

Note: Your machine will be in the Auto power

off mode when the time you set has

passed after the Sleep mode starts.

Enter

G.Sound Settings

Use cursor to select

item.

01.Fax Ringer

02.Volume

03.Key Touch Tone

04.Complete Beep

05.Paper Jam Alarm

Select the desired setting using the cursor key,

and then press [En ter ].

Press [En ter ].

Fa x Rin ger — go to step 4.

Volu m e — go to step 5.

Key Tou ch Ton e — go to step 6.

Com p lete Beep — go to step 8.

Pa p er J a m Ala r m — go to step 10.

Enter

4.8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

01.Fax Ringer

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

Copy

Use cursor to select

item.

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

OFF

To set the “Fa x Rin ger ”:

Select the desired type of beep using the cursor

key. Then press [En ter ] to save the setting.

If you want the machine’s ringer to alert you

when you receive a fax though you do not have

the optional handset, select “ON”.

If you want to set the type of beep for other

item, repeat steps 8–9.

Then press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Note: If you want to try to hear each sound,

press [Test].

▲

▼

Enter

Test

Enter

02.Volume

05.Paper Jam Alarm

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

To set the “Volu m e”:

Use cursor to select

item.

To set the “Pa per J a m Ala r m ”:

Select the desired volume for fax ringer, alarm,

key touch tone and complete beep using the

cursor key. Then press [En ter ] to save the set-

ting.

Max

Mid

Min

OFF

Select “ON” or “OF F ” using the cursor key.

Then press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Enter

▲

▼

Enter

Press RESET to return to the standby mode.

03.Key Touch Tone

Use cursor to select

item.

To set the “Key Tou ch Ton e”:

Select the mode you want and press [En ter ].

Fax

Copy

:Mid

Enter

Fax Key Touch Tone

Use cursor to select

item.

High

Mid

Low

Select the desired tone using the cursor key.

Then press [En ter ] to save the setting.

If you want to set the tone for other mode,

repeat steps 6–7.

Note: Moving the cursor key, you can hear

each sound.

Enter

04.Complete Beep

Use cursor to select

item.

Copy :Type 1

Tx/Rx :Type 1

FaxPrinting :Type 1

To set the “Com plete Beep”:

Select the item you want and press [En ter ].

Enter

4.9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

H. Paper for list printing

When you print a list, your machine selects a paper automatically. However, you can

set the paper size or cassette for list printing, if you want.

I. 2-Bin tray (Option)

When you have the optional 2-Bin tray, you can set where to exit a copied paper, a

received fax message and a list, on the upper tray or the lower tray.

Note: If the list can not be printed on one sheet with 100% ratio, it may be reduced

or rotated. If the paper you set is not in the cassette, it will be printed on

other size paper automatically.

Note: Papers except for the plain paper will be not stacked on the upper tray, even

if you set it to “Upper”.

Machine Settings

F.Auto Power Off Mode

G.Sound Settings

H.Paper for List

Use cursor to select

item.

Machine Settings

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set].

Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set].

F.Auto Power Off Mode

G.Sound Settings

H.Paper for List

J.Print Machine Setting

L.Print Stored Doc. List

Select “I. 2-Bin Tr a y Settin g” using the cur-

sor key. Then press [En ter ].

Select “H. Pa p er for List” using the cursor

key. Then press [En ter ].

I.2-Bin Tray Setting

J.Print Machine Setting

Enter

I.2-Bin Tray Setting

Use cursor to select

item and exit tray.

Machine Settings

Select the item you want to change the setting

using the cursor key.

Auto

Use cursor to select

paper to print list.

If you want to select certain paper size for list

printing, proceed to step 4.

If you want to select certain cassette, skip to

step 5.

Copy exit

Fax exit

List exit

:Lower

:Upper

Select [Up p er ] or [Low er ] as you want.

11x17

Legal

Letter

H.LTR

After you set all items you want to change,

press [En ter ].

Upper　 Lower

Enter

Select the paper size using the cursor key and

press [En ter ].

Cassette

Enter

The machine will return to standby mode.

J. Printing of the machine setting list

Machine Settings

1st Cassette

2nd Cassette

Use cursor to select

paper to print list.

Press [Ca ssette].

Machine Settings

Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set].

Select the cassette using the cursor key and

press [En ter ].

F.Auto Power Off Mode

G.Sound Settings

H.Paper for List

J.Print Machine Setting

L.Print Stored Doc. List

Select “J . P r in t Ma ch in e Settin g” using the

cursor key. Then press [List].

The machine will return to standby mode.

Ppr.Size

Enter

List

K. Settings for printer controller (Option)

You can set the printer controller settings here. See the operating instructions of the

printer controller for details.

4.10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

L. Print the list of documents stored in memory

Your machine will print the list of the documents stored in the memory. It will tell

you how much memory each document is using.

M. Energy saving release time

If you want your machine to wake up from the Sleep mode or the Auto power off

mode at a certain time, you can set it here.

The list includes:

Machine Settings

M.EnargySave ReleaseTime

N.Department Codes

Use cursor to select

item.

•

Type — The type of the document, such as “Batch box”, will appear.

Data(KB) — How much memory is used for the document will appear.

Page — The number of pages will appear.

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set].

Select “M.En er gySa ve Relea seTim e” using

the cursor key. Then press [En ter ].

Note — Other information, such as the box number, will appear.

Machine Settings

F.Auto Power Off Mode

G.Sound Settings

H.Paper for List

Enter

Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set].

M.EnergySave ReleaseTime

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

Select “L. P r in t Stor ed Doc. List” using the

cursor key.

Select “ON” or “OF F ” using the cursor key.

Then press [En ter ].

J.Print Machine Setting

L.Print Stored Doc. List

OFF

Press [List].

Note: If you set it to OFF, your machine will

List

The list of the documents stored in the memory

will be printed.

return to standby mode.

▲　　　　　　　▼　　　　　Enter

M.EnergySave ReleaseTime

Enter Release Time

00:00

Enter the time for releasing the sleep mode or

the Auto power off mode with 24-hour format

using numeric keypad.

Press [En ter ].

Enter

4.11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

Entering a department name

You can enter a department name for each department number.

A department name may be up to 10 characters in length. You can send a fax or

make a copy with entering this department name instead of the four-digit depart-

ment code. (See “Select the department mode” on page 4.13.)

N. Department codes

When the department code setting is activated, the machine reminds each user to

enter the department code before sending a document or making copies. With this

feature, the fax transaction time and the copy charge can be managed by depart-

ment.

To enter a department name:

After you turn on this setting, assign specific code to your office’s machine users and

tell them to enter these department codes before sending faxes or making copies.

Machine Settings

M.EnergySave ReleaseTime

N.Department Codes

Use cursor to select

item.

You will set the followings for the department code feature:

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set],

NEXT.

•

Department code

Press [Dep t.ID].

The LCD shows the department code list.

Department ID

Department code setting (On or Off)

Department code protection

Department mode

Dept.ID

Erase

Protect

Copy charge setting

N.Department Codes

0010

0020

0030

0040

0050

Use cursor to select

department code.

Entering a department code

Your machine can hold up to 100 separate department codes.

Select the department code you want.

Note: If you want to erase an existing depart-

ment ID, select it and press [Er a se],

[Yes].

To enter a department code:

N.Department Codes

Enter department code.

Press [En ter ].

Erase

Enter

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set], N, [En ter ].

The LCD shows the department code list.

N.Department Codes

Enter department ID.

0010

0020

0030

0040

0050

Note: If department code operation is pro-

tected (see page 4.13), the fax beeps

briefly and then returns to standby

mode. You will have to turn off the

protection first, then repeat this step.

Use the one-touch keys or the numeric keypad

to enter the department ID. It may be up to 10

characters in length. Regarding entering char-

acters, see page 1.15.

Add

Clear

Enter

Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit department code, 0000–9999.

Note: If you want to erase characters, press

Clear

Enter

[Clea r ].

If you want to erase an existing entry in the department code list, press

of the cursor key to select the number then press [Clea r ].

Note: The lower case characters are not available here.

Press [Ad d ] to entry in the department code list.

If you want to enter another department code, repeat steps 2–3.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

If you want to enter a department ID for another department code, repeat

steps 3–6.

To finish, press RESET.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting. The machine will return to standby mode.

4.12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

Turning the department code setting on and off

Select the department mode

You can select the mode, department code (four-digit number) or department ID (ten

characters or numbers), which you will enter before sending a fax or making a copy.

N.Department Codes

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set],

Machine Settings

M.EnergySave ReleaseTime

N.Department Codes

Use cursor to select

item.

Press [Settin g].

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set],

NEXT, NEXT.

Note: If department code operation is pro-

tected (see below), the fax beeps briefly

and then returns to standby mode. You

Press [Mod e].

Enter

will have to turn off the protection first, then repeat this step.

Mode

Select desired setting.

N.Department Codes

Department Code

Department ID

Use cursor to select

item.

Press [En ter ].

Select desired setting.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Turning department code protection on and off

Im p or ta n t: This feature will work only if you’ve activated the passcode protection

(see page 3.61).

Enter

N.Department Codes

Enter protect passcode.

****

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set],

NEXT.

Press [P r otect].

Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit

passcode.

Enter

Press [En ter ].

N.Department Codes

Use cursor to select

ON or OFF.

OFF

Select desired setting.

Press [En ter ] to save the setting.

Enter

4.13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

Sending a fax using a department code

Making a copy using a department code

For this operation to work, two things must be true:

•

The four-digit department code must exist on your fax machine.

You must know the department code or department ID.

•

The four-digit department code must exist on your fax machine.

You must know the department code or department ID.

Note: If you press [No Cop y] in step 4 or 5 below, you can set a copy setting or

Place the document and select resolution and contrast you require.

print a list without entering the department code.

Enter the fax number by either pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-

dial number or dialing from the numeric keypad.

Place the document and set any settings you want.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies.

If you enter the fax number using a one-touch key, skip to step 4.

Otherwise, go on to step 3.

Press START.

If you select the department code for the department mode above, proceed to

step 4.

If you select the department code for the department mode in the previous

column, proceed to step 5.

If you select the department ID for the department mode, skip to step 6.

If you select the department ID for the department mode above, skip to step

Department Codes

Enter department code.

0000

Transmission

Enter department code.

0000

123-4567

Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropri-

ate four-digit department code.

Skip to step 6.

Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropri-

ate four-digit department code.

Skip to step 7.

No Copy Enter

Enter

Department Codes

Enter department ID.

Transmission

Enter department ID.

123-4567

Use the one-touch keys or the numeric keypad

to enter the appropriate department ID.

Use the one-touch keys or the numeric keypad

to enter the appropriate department ID.

No Copy Clear

Enter

Clear

Enter

Press [En ter ].

4.14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

Printing the department code list for fax

Copy charge setting

The department code list for fax transmissions includes the following information

for each department code:

You can manage the copy charge for each department code.

Note: If you made duplexed copies with the optional duplex unit, the machine will

count 2 pages for 1 sheet.

To enter the copy charge per page:

•

Time period covered by the department code list

Each department code

Each department ID

Copy Settings

Total communication time (in hours, minutes and seconds; HH:MM:SS) — Counts

the communication time up to 999:59:59 (999 hours:59 minutes:59 seconds). If the

fax exceeds the maximum time, it does not count further.

Use cursor to select

item.

Press COP Y to change to the copy mode,

F.Print Copy Settings

G.Copy Charge

if necessary.

Press MENU, [Cop y Set].

•

Total printed pages — Counts the pages up to 65535 pages. If the fax exceeds the

maximum number of pages, it counts the total pages from 0 (zero).

Select “G.Cop y Ch a r ge” using the cursor key.

Then press [En ter ].

Note: If you want to clear the total counts of each department code, see “Clearing

List

Enter

the current department code list”, below.

G.Copy Charge Setting

Enter copy charge.

$00.00/page

To print the list:

Use the numeric keypad to enter the copy

charge per page.

N.Department Codes

　　　　Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set], N, [List].

Press [En ter ].

Copy Dept. List

Fax Dept. List

Select “Fa x Dep t. List” using the

Enter

cursor key. Then press [En ter ].

The department code list for fax transmissions

will be printed.

　　　▲　　　　　　　▼　　　　　Enter

Printing the department code list for copy

The department code list for copy charge includes the following information for each

department code:

Note: If department code operation is protected (see page 4.13), the machine beeps

briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn off the pro-

tection first, then repeat the above.

•

Time period covered by the department code list

Each department code

Clearing the department code list for fax

To clear the current total counts of each department code:

Each department name

Total copy charge (in dollars) — Counts the copy charge up to 99.99 (99 dollars 99

cents). If the copy exceeds the maximum charge, it does not count further.

N.Department Codes

　　　　Use cursor to select

item.

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set],

NEXT, [Er a se].

Copy Dept. List

Fax Dept. List

•

Total printed pages — Counts the pages up to 65000 pages.

Select “Fa x Dep t. List” using the

cursor key. Then press [En ter ].

Note: If you want to clear the total counts of each department code, see “Clearing

the current department code list”, next column.

Press [Yes].

▲

▼

Enter

The total communication time and total printed pages for each department code are

cleared. The department code will not be erased.

4.15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

To print the list:

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set], N, [List].

N.Department Codes

Use cursor to select

item.

Select “Cop y Dep t. List” and press [En ter ].

Copy Dept. List

Fax Dept. List

The department code list for copy charge will be

printed.

▲

▼

Enter

Note: If department code operation is protected (see page 4.13), the machine beeps

briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn off the pro-

tection first, then repeat the above.

Clearing the department code list for copy

To clear the current total counts of each department code:

Press MENU, [Ma ch Set],

NEXT, [Er a se].

N.Department Codes

Use cursor to select

item.

Select “Cop y Dep t. List” and press [En ter ].

Copy Dept. List

Fax Dept. List

▲

▼

Enter

N.Department Codes

Enter department code.

0000

Copy Dept. List

Use the numeric keypad to enter the depart-

ment code you want to erase the current total

counts. Then press [En ter ].

Fax Dept. List

Note: If you’ve selected department ID for

department mode, enter the depart-

ment ID instead of department code.

EraseAll Enter

Note: If you want to erase the data for all department codes, press

[Er a seAll].

Press [Yes].

The total copy charge and total printed pages for each department code are cleared.

The department code will not be erased.

4.16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

This page intentionally blank.

4.17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case ...

Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1

Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6

Caring for your machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8

In the event of a power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11

Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

Clearing paper jams

If an original document jams

If an original document jam occurred during scanning, an alarm sounds and the

part the paper jammed will blink on the LCD. Please remove the jammed paper care-

fully as below.

Open the inner cover as shown at right,

then remove the document by turning

the green dial right. Then skip to step 5.

If you cannot remove the original docu-

ment, proceed to step 4.

Im p or ta n t: If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key, the

machine will delete from memory all pages stored during this opera-

tion and the machine will return to the standby mode.

Note: If this document is a non-sorting ADF job (either copying or faxing), the

machine will abort the operation anyway; instead, you’ll have to perform the

job again from scratch.

Note: In Quick memory transmission, the check message will be printed, which

Lift the document tray as shown at

right, then remove the document.

has the number of jammed page. Reset the jammed documents and transmit

it.

Gently close the inner cover and the ADF

cover, making sure both sides are

snapped down securely.

If the ADF cover is blinking on the LCD:

Document jam

Open the ADF cover by holding the ADF cover

release.

Note: If the original document has

become wrinkled or torn, do not

re-send it.

Open & Check

the blinking

cover.

Fax Ready

Nov 26 2000

Fax Ready

Reserved

13:30

Memory 99%

If this LCD appears, you can continue scanning

from the jammed page. If you want to continue,

press [Yes].

Remove the original document from the

machine by turning the green dial right.

Then skip to step 5.

If you cannot remove the original docu-

ment, proceed to step 3.

Continue the

Storing?

Note: If you press [No], only scanned pages

before the paper jam occurred will be

transmitted or copied.

Yes

Note: If you wish to cancel this operation, press STOP . The machine will

delete all pages from memory and then return to its standby mode.

Reset the documents from the jammed page and press START.

5.1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

If a printout jams

If a printout jam occurred during printing, an alarm sounds and the part the paper

jammed will blink on the LCD. Please remove the jammed paper carefully as below.

If the platen cover is blinking on the LCD:

Document jam

Open & Check

the blinking

cover.

CAUTION: The fuser unit becomes very hot. Do n ot touch the fuser unit

when you are removing a paper jam.

Electrical Contacts

Im p or ta n t: Do n ot touch the electrical contacts

inside the printer cover or under the

drum cartridge, as an electrostatic dis-

charge may damage the machine.

Open the platen cover.

When the paper jammed inside the machine

Open the printer cover by holding the

printer cover release (R1).

Open the ADF cover by holding the ADF cover release.

Remove the original document from the

machine by turning the green dial

toward right or left.

CAUTION:

Be careful not to put your hand

under the platen cover and the

ADF cover.

Open the fuser cover by pressing the

fuser cover release (R²).

CAUTION:

The fuser unit becomes very hot.

Do n ot touch the fuser unit

when you are removing a paper

jam.

Confirm that any document does not remain in the ADF cover, and then close

the ADF cover and the platen cover.

Follow steps 6–7 on page 5.1.

5.2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

Turn the green dial as the arrow indicates and remove the jammed paper.

Remove the jammed paper.

Close the fuser cover.

Cassette

Optional Large capacity cassette

Remove the jammed paper.

Close the printer cover.

Remove the jammed paper.

Close the side cover.

Open the side cover.

Pull the cassette toward you and remove

the papers in the cassette.

Reset the papers into the cassette and

close the cassette.

5.3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

The Bypass tray

The optional duplex unit

Open the printer cover by holding the

printer cover release (R¹).

Open the duplex unit cover.

Im p or ta n t: Never touch the electrical contacts inside the printer cover or

under the drum cartridge, as an electrostatic discharge may

damage the machine.

Remove the jammed paper.

Electrical Contacts

Remove the jammed paper.

Close the printer cover.

Open the printer cover by holding the

printer cover release (R1). Remove the

jammed paper

Close the duplex unit cover and the

printer cover.

5.4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

The optional 2-Bin tray or the optional shift tray

Open the 2-Bin tray cover or the shift

tray cover.

Open the printer cover by holding the

printer cover release (R1).

Im p or ta n t: Never touch the electrical contacts inside the printer cover or

under the drum cartridge, as an electrostatic discharge may

damage the machine.

Remove the jammed paper.

Electrical Contacts

Close the 2-Bin tray or the shift tray.

Open the fuser cover by pressing the

fuser cover release (R2).

Close the fuser cover, and then close the printer cover

CAUTION:

The fuser unit becomes very hot.

Do n ot touch it.

5.5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

Print quality problems

If your machine’s printouts develop quality problems, try to find the example below

that matches your printout problem. When you find one which is like yours, try the

suggested solutions. If they don’t work, contact your authorized Muratec dealer.

Printouts are too dark

ABCDE

•

The toner cartridge may be defective.

Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.

If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.

Pages are blank

•

The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may not be

installed correctly.

Install each cartridge correctly.

•

The toner cartridge may be out of toner, or the toner may

be very low.

Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to

redistribute the toner inside.

If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.

Printouts have a blurred background

ABCDE

•

The toner cartridge may be defective.

Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.

If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.

•

The toner cartridge may be defective.

Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.

If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.

Pages are black

•

The toner cartridge may be defective.

Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.

If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.

•

Your fax machine’s printer may be due for a service check.

Call your dealer.

Printouts are of uneven density

•

The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the

toner cartridge.

ABCDE

Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to

redistribute the toner inside.

Printouts are too light

•

The drum cartridge may be defective.

Remove the drum cartridge and check it for damage.

If the problem persists, replace the drum cartridge.

ABCDE

The toner cartridge may be out of toner, or the toner may

be very low.

Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to

redistribute the toner inside.

If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.

•

The toner cartridge may be defective.

Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.

If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.

5.6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

Printouts have irregularities

Printouts have toner smudges

•

The paper you’re using may have absorbed moisture, per-

haps due either to high humidity or water having been

spilled on the paper supply. Toner will not adhere well to

wet paper.

•

The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the toner

cartridge.

Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to

redistribute the toner inside. If the problem persists, replace

the cartridge.

ABCDE

Replace the paper with dry paper and try printing again.

•

The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.

Remove the cartridges and check them for damage. If the

problem persists, replace either or both of the cartridges as

indicated.

If you find smudges on the back of the printouts, the trans-

port roller may be dirty.

Your machine normally cleans the transport roller automat-

ically. If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized

Muratec dealer.

Printouts have white and/or black lines

•

The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.

Remove the cartridges and check them for damage.

If the problem persists, replace either or both of the car-

tridges as indicated.

ABCDE

•

The LED print head may be dirty.

Using the cleaning paper, gently clean the LED print head.

Printouts have white spots

•

The charger may be dirty.

ABCDE

Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.

If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized

Muratec dealer.

Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.

If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized

Muratec dealer.

Printouts have black lines or multiple streaks

•

The toner cartridge may have been stored improperly.

Try following procedure to clear up the problem:

COP Y/F AX to change to the copy mode.

1 ^Press

ADF or FBS, remove it.

2 ^{If there is a document in the}

3 ^{Open the book-cover fully.}

START to make a black copy.

4 ^Press

5.7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

Caring for your machine

With proper installation and a little maintenance, your machine should give you

dependable service for years to come.

Corrective cleaning

Here are some simple cleaning procedures for keeping your machine operating

smoothly. Use each as the need arises.

Although it requires little day-to-day care, you can take these simple precautions to

keep it in top form:

•

Alw a ys make sure your machine is installed according to our specifications,

including using an electrical surge suppressor.

Curing frequent jams in the ADF

If you’re having trouble with getting your original documents to feed properly, try

this procedure:

•

Alw a ys use good, copier-quality paper.

Alw a ys clean your machine as needed (see “Cleaning tips,” below).

Turn off your machine.

Never install your machine where it can overheat, gather dust or get splashed

by any liquids (even water).

Get two soft, lint-free cloths and moisten them as follows:

•

One with a cleaner suitable for use on platen/rubber rollers. In steps 4 and

6, we’ll call this the rollers cleaner.

Cleaning tips

Some things to keep in mind about cleaning your machine:

•

The other with water

•

Do clean it! Dust and dirt, especially around the machine’s air vents can shorten

your machine’s life.

Open the ADF cover by holding the ADF

cover release.

•

Alw a ys unplug the machine before you clean it.

Use the cloth with the rollers cleaner

to clean the face of the rollers. Rotate

the rollers by hand to allow cleaning

of the entire roller surface.

Never spr a y a n y clea n er DIRECTLY on to you r m a ch in e. The drifting spray

could damage components inside.

•

Never tr y to clea n SEALED a r ea s in sid e you r m a ch in e. They’re sealed to pro-

tect your safety and the machine.

For cleaning external surfaces, such as the cover and handset: use a mild clean-

ing solution sprayed onto a lint-free towel or cloth.

Alw a ys use a lint-free cloth (or swabs) moistened with water to gently wipe com-

ponents inside your machine.

In areas you can’t reach with swabs, a lw a ys use dry, dust-free compressed air to

gently blow away dust and other material.

5.8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

Cleaning the FBS

Open the inner cover.

Im p or ta n t: You must hold the cover open. It won’t stay open by itself.

Open the platen cover.

Use the cloth with the rollers cleaner to clean the face of the rollers. Rotate

the rollers by hand to allow cleaning of the entire roller surface.

Get a soft, lint-free cloth and moisten it with water.

Im p or ta n t: Make sure the cloth doesn’t have any rough areas. Otherwise, it

could scratch the glass surface of the FBS.

Using the cloth, gently clean the glass

surface of the FBS and the white back-

ground area on the underside of the

platen cover.

Close the inner cover.

Close the ADF cover, making sure both sides are snapped down securely.

If you have unsatisfactory printout quality

Open the platen cover.

Your machine automatically cleans its charger and transport roller, two items which

are very important to printout quality. So, if you notice poor printout quality

(whether on received faxes or on copies), it may mean that your machine requires

service. Review "Print quality problems" (pages 5.6–5.7), and see whether any of the

proposed solutions helps your machine. If none do, please call your authorized

Muratec dealer or call the Muratec Customer Support Center at (972) 364-3350.

Use the cloth moistened with water to

clean the contact glass.

Close the platen cover.

5.9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

In the event of a power failure

Power failure during the machine is working

Memory back up

The image data stored in memory will be kept for the following time, even when the

power failure occurs or your machine is turned off.

During telephone call:

You can continue to speak with the handset.

Note: Your machine should be charged for 48 hours continuously before.

During fax transmission:

The transmission will be cut off. When the power comes back, your machine starts

to transmit again automatically if it was the memory transmission. If it was the

feeder transmission, you should transmit again.

16 MB: about 60 hours (Standard)

24 MB: about 36 hours

40 MB: about 12 hours

During fax reception:

56 MB: about 5 hours

The reception will be cut off. When the power comes back, your machine prints the

pages which were received before the power failure occurred.

Power failure report

If any documents in memory were erased due to power failure, the report will be

printed when the power comes back. The report tells you what documents were

erased.

During copying/ printing:

The printing will stop.

During power failure

Your machine can receive telephone calls even in the event of a power failure if an

optional handset is attached. But it cannot send or receive a fax document.

5.10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

Troubleshooting

Occasionally, your machine encounters some trouble transmitting or receiving docu-

ments. When it does, it alerts you with an alarm. You can identify the problem with

LCD messages and printed check messages and error reports, explained in the follow-

ing pages.

Cop y p r otected

You tried to use your machine to make a copy, but the

unit’s copy protection feature is on, preventing such use.

Turn off copy protection. (See “Copy protect” on page 4.7)

En ter job h old tim e.

You tried to use the "Last Job" feature, but the "Last Job

hold time" has not been entered. Enter the "Last Job hold

time". (See "Last Job Hold Time" on page 2.28.)

Alarm

No p a p er size

is su ita ble.

OK to con tin u e

cop yin g?

Your machine does not have suitable sized papers for Mix

length copy. To continue, press START and supply the

papers the LCD shows. Or, press STOP and select

other ratio.

Your fax machine sounds an alarm tone — a series of short beeps — if either of

these two problems occur:

•

Trouble transmitting or receiving

The machine is out of paper

No p a p er size

is su ita ble.

There is no paper that matches the reduce/enlarge ratio.

Press STOP then select paper manually.

Cop yin g w ith a u to

selected p a p er.

LCD error messages

If a message not listed here is displayed, take corrective action by following the

instructions in the message.

Not en ou gh m em or y

Th e la st XXX p a ge

w a s er a sed .

The copying was stopped because of memory overflow.

Please copy again from indicated page.

< Copy >

P lea se cop y a ga in .

What you see on the LCD

What it means/What to do

Not a va ila ble w ith

XXXX

P lea se ca ll ser vice

You have set two functions that conflict with each other.

Cancel either one of the two functions.

The printer unit of your fax machine has become inopera-

ble. Call your authorized Muratec dealer or Muratec

Customer Support.

ADF is n ot

a va ila ble.

Set d ocu m en t

on FBS gla ss

When use the series copy function, the document is set in

the ADF. You cannot use the ADF for series copy.

Remove the document from ADF, then set the document

on FBS glass.

Au to d oc. size

d etection fa iled .

Non-standard size document is set. Your machine can

Not en ou gh m em or y. The "Last Job" document cannot be stored due to a

Docu m en t w a s er a sed . memory shortage.

detect Letter

, Legal , Half-letter

and

11″×17″(ledger ) sized document only.

Rota te d ocu m en t

by 90° or set r a tio

In combine, repeat, series copy or booklet

function, the document is set in the incorrect direction.

Set the document in the rotate by 90° or set the

reduce/ enlarge ratio.

Pressing START to copy your document to the auto selected

paper. Or, press STOP then select paper manually by using

the [Paper]. And then try again.

. . . or . . .

Document is not set. Set your document.

Set d ocu m en t in ADF In Booklet copy, you cannot use the FBS glass.

Set your document in ADF for Booklet copies.

Ch eck p a p er size

The paper size setting is incorrect.

Check the paper size and set the proper paper size.

Un a ble to set

r a tio d u r in g

D.Ma g. is u sed .

You cannot set the reduce/enlarge ratio during

the directional magnification function is used.

5.11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

Com m u n ica tion Er r or

A communication error disrupted the transmis-

sion or reception. If you were transmitting, press

STOP to clear the error message and then retry

the transmission. If you were receiving a fax, try

to contact the other person and have them retry

the transmission. (The problem may be entirely

with their machine, phone line, etc.)

< Fax >

What you see on the LCD

What it means/What to do

1 loca tion or less

You tried to enter too many forwarding numbers

for fax forwarding through the numeric keypad.

You can enter up to 201 forwarding numbers by

using one-touch key, speed dial number, group

number and numeric keypad, but you can enter

only 1 location by using numeric keypad (see

pages 3.36–3.37).

Docu m en t fu ll

You tried to enter an document into Batch box

or an F-Code box, but the machine has reached

its capacity. Delete documents stored in boxes

until the machine will let you proceed.

30 loca tion s or less

You tried to enter too many numbers for broad-

cast through the numeric keypad.

Docu m en t is in th e ADF

Docu m en t stor ed

The command you’re trying to enter requires the

use of the ADF, which is already in use. Wait for

the machine to stop using the ADF, then try

again.

You can enter up to 230 numbers for broadcast

using one-touch keys, speed dial numbers or

group numbers, however you can enter only 30

locations by using the numeric keypad.

Press [Ca n cel] to delete the extra numbers and

then try again.

You tried to erase a batch box which contains at

least one document. Erase the document(s), then

try again.

Alr ea d y stor ed

You tried to enter a same number, department

code or sub-address which is already entered in

your machine.

Enter a different number, department code or

sub-address.

. . . or . . .

You tried to store the polling document in your

fax machine, where one already had been

stored. Wait for the fax to complete the regular

polling operation, then try again.

Box in u se

You tried to erase a F-Code box which contains

at least one document.

. . . or . . .

A received document was in your fax’s memory

when you tried to turn off the security reception

passcode. Print the received document from your

fax’s memory, then retry the desired operation.

Erase the document(s), then try again.

Ch eck # of d ocu m en ts

You placed fewer pages into your fax machine

than you indicated in your page-numbering set-

ting (see page 3.41). Carefully recount the pages

in your document, then retry the transmission,

being sure to enter the correct number of pages if

you use the page-numbering function.

En ter n u m ber (0-32)

Ha n g Up P h on e

You tried to enter a call group number greater

than 32. Your machine can maintain 32 call

groups, numbered 1-32 (call group 0 covers all

the groups). Determine the correct call group

identifier number and enter it, instead.

Com m a n d s fu ll

Your fax machine has all of its 100 possible

delayed commands (automatic redialing counts

as one) stored in memory and cannot accept

another. Delete an existing command by using

REVIEW COMMANDS, or wait until your fax has

completed one of the delayed commands.

The optional handset is off-hook.

Hang it up, making sure the upper part of the

handset presses down on the “hook” button.

In va lid I.D. cod e

In va lid Nu m ber

The F-Code box

Try re-entering your F-Code box

D. code you entered isn’t valid.

D. code.

You entered the incorrect number which has no

function during the current operation.

5.12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

You selected “Mode1” in the PIN mask feature

and tried to call an autodialer number in which

no PIN has been entered, or to call using

numeric keypad without PIN. Enter a PIN, then

try again.

In va lid p r otect p a sscod e

No com m a n d stor ed

The protection passcode you entered isn’t valid.

Repeat the operation, entering the correct protec-

tion passcode.

P IN is n ot stor ed

You pressed REVIEW COMMANDS to review

upcoming commands, but your fax machine had

none stored.

P lea se set Fa x/Tel Mod e.

Set In d iv Fr w d #s fir st

Su p p ly p a p er for fa x d oc.

You tried to set the Fax Forwarding feature to

ON when the reception mode is Tel Ready.

Set the reception mode to Fax/ Tel Ready.

No d ocu m en t stor ed

No p r otect p a sscod e

You tried to print a document from memory, but

your fax machine had none stored.

You tried to set the Fax Forwarding feature to

ON when all individual setting is set to OFF.

Set the individual setting to ON.

You tried to protect an operation or department

code but there’s no protection passcode stored in

your fax machine. Store a protection passcode in

your machine, then retry protecting the operation

or department code.

Your machine receives a fax message when it

does not have standard sized papers which can

be used for the fax reception (refer to page 3.8),

or the cassette is set to OFF for “Cassette for

Rx” (refer to page 3.8). Add standard sized

papers to the cassette, or set to ON for “Cassette

for Rx”.

No r ep or t

Not stor ed

You requested an activity journal or confirma-

tion report, but your fax machine has no record

of any fax jobs having occurred.

You selected an autodialer, batch box or F-Code

box number for which there is no phone number

programmed. Either choose another number or

dial a phone number directly from the numeric

keypad.

Un a ble to r ed u ce

In enlargement transmission, you cannot select

the reduction ratio.

. . . or . . .

You tried to turn on the department code setting

but there are no department codes stored in

your fax machine. Store at least one department

code, then try again.

Not stor e in Rela y box

Not stor e in Secu r e box

You tried to store a document for polling in an

F-Code box which is set to be a relay box.

Select an F-Code box which is set to be a bulletin

box, then try again.

You tried to store a document for polling in an

F-Code box which is set to be a security box.

Select an F-Code box which is set to be a bulletin

box, then try again.

Wou ld you lik e to en ter ?

You pressed an empty one-touch key or speed

dial number.

Press [Yes] to tell your machine to enter it, or

press [No] to cancel entering.

5.13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

< Common >

Sca n n er in u se

The command you’re trying to enter requires the

use of the scanner, which is already in use. Wait

for the fax to complete the scan, then retry the

desired command.

What you see on the LCD

What it means/What to do

Ca ll for ser vice

The scanner lamp is dim or inoperable.

Make repeated copies to help evaporate any

internal moisture. If that doesn’t resolve the

problem, call your authorized Muratec dealer or

Muratec Customer Support.

Ton er bottle

is em p ty

Your machine is almost out of toner.

About 50 more sheets can be printed and your

machine will count down the number of sheets

which can be printed. Please contact your autho-

rized Muratec dealer soon to purchase a new

toner bottle if you don’t already have one.

Ca n n ot r egister Ma cr o k ey.

P lea se u se Soft k ey.

You cannot register "Last Job" feature to the

Macro key. Assign it to a Soft key.

Note: According to the resolution and document

type, your machine may become not to print

before the number of sheets on the LCD becomes

to be “0”.

Ca r r ia ge er r or

The mirror carriage of your machine has become

inoperable. Call your authorized Muratec dealer

or Muratec Customer Support.

Dr u m ca r tr id ge

is a lm ost em p ty

Your machine can print about 500 more sheets.

It will count down the number of sheets which

can be printed. Please contact your authorized

Muratec dealer soon to purchase a new drum

cartridge if you don’t already have one.

Ton er is em p ty

Your machine is out of toner.

Your machine cannot print until it is replaced

with a new toner bottle.

500

Replace it.

Too m a n y ch a r a cter s

Too m a n y loca tion s

You attempted to enter too many numbers or

other characters in the current operation.

Press [Ca n cel] to delete the extra characters,

then try again. You may wish to review the oper-

ation’s appropriate instructions.

Note: According to the resolution and document

type, your machine may become not to print

before the number of sheets on the LCD becomes

to be “0”.

Not a va il. w ith ADF

P lea se ca ll ser vice

You tried to use the function which cannot be

used in ADF. Use the FBS glass.

You tried to enter department code more than

100. Your machine can store up to 100 depart-

ment codes.

The printer unit of your fax machine has become

inoperable. Call your authorized Muratec dealer

or Muratec Customer Support.

Too m a n y step s

OK to r egister ?

You tried to enter too many steps for a macro.

You can enter up to 60 steps into a macro key.

Press [YES] to tell your fax to register these

steps, or press [NO] to cancel the registering.

P lea se cor r ect er r or fir st

P lea se w a it

You pressed the Start key when an error has

occurred. Correct the error.

# of stor ed p a ge: XXX

Keep th ese p a ges?

During scanning of the document, the memory

overflowed. Press [YES] to tell your fax to keep

as many pages in memory as possible, or press

[NO] to delete from memory all pages stored

during this operation (but not previous opera-

tions).

Your fax machine’s printer is either warming up

or busy. Please wait until the fax is finished

printing and then re-try your command or opera-

tion.

P r in tin g

The command you’re trying to enter requires the

use of the printer, which is already in use. Wait

for the fax to finish printing, then try again.

Replace

dr u m car tr idge

Your drum cartridge doesn’t work.

Your machine cannot print until it is replaced

with a new drum cartridge.

Replace it.

5.14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

The machine is not functioning as designed

Sym p tom

Ch eck for /Wh a t to d o

Sym p tom

Ch eck for /Wh a t to d o

In Combine mode,

parts of the image are

not copied or parts

of the copy paper are

blank.

Your set originals are not identical in size and direction.

It is impossible to combine originals as they are not

identical in size and direction. Copy these originals with

the same size paper, set copies which are identical in size

and direction, and then select Combine.

The LCD shows nothing. Is only the ENERGY SAVING key lit up green?

The machine is in the Energy Saver mode. Press any key

on the control panel to cancel.

. . . or . . .

The power switch is turned OFF.

Turn the power switch ON.

. . . or . . .

In Combine mode,

order of copies is not

correct.

Your originals are set in incorrect order.

When you set a stack of originals in the ADF, the first page

must be on top.

When you set an original on the FBS glass, start with the

first page to be copied.

The LCD contrast volume is turned to the excessively light

or dark position.

Viewing the LCD, adjust the LCD contrast volume as neces-

sary.

In Duplex copy mode,

order of copies is not

correct.

Your originals are set in incorrect order.

When you set a stack of originals in the ADF, the first page

must be on top.

When you set an original on the FBS glass, start with the

first page to be copied.

Control panel keys

do not respond.

Is only the ENERGY SAVING key lit up LED?

The machine is in the auto power off mode.

Press ENERGY SAVING key on the control panel to cancel.

. . . or . . .

The power switch is turned OF F.

Turn the power switch ON.

The machine is not

activated when the

power switch is turned

ON.

The power cord is left unplugged from the power outlet.

Plug the power cord into the power outlet.

Misfeeds occur

frequently.

Paper size setting is incorrect.

Set the correct paper size.

Some of the selected

functions are

unavailable.

Selected functions cannot be combined.

Check the combination of functions. (See “Combination

chart,” pages AI.4–AI.5.)

In EraseBorder or

EraseCenter mode,

parts of the original

image are not copied.

Margin is too wide. Or, margin of your document is too

narrow.

Set the narrower margin.

5.15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

If you cannot make clear copies

Sym p tom

Possible ca u se/Wh a t to d o

Sym p tom

Possible ca u se/Wh a t to d o

The edge of the copy is The FBS pad is dirty.

dirty. Wipe the FBS pad clean with a soft cloth dampened with

The image is too light. The image contrast is too light.

Adjust the image contrast by pressing CONTRAST key.

alcohol.

. . . or . . .

The toner is low.

Replace the toner bottle.

You have selected a paper size larger than your original

document. (When zoom ratio is set as full size 100%)

Select the same copy paper size as the original.

. . . or . . .

The paper is damp.

Change the paper.

The original document is not placed in the correct posi-

tion. (When zoom ratio is set as full size 100%)

Select the same copy paper size as the original. Or, reload

the paper in the same direction as the original.

The image is too dark. The image contrast is too dark.

Adjust the image contrast by pressing CONTRAST key.

. . . or . . .

The FBS glass surface is dirty.

Wipe the FBS glass clean with a soft dry cloth.

The reduction ratio selected is not in accord with the copy

paper size. (When doing the manual reduction copying.)

Select the enlarge ratio according to the copy paper size.

The copy is blurry.

The paper is damp.

Change the paper.

The image on the copy The original document is not placed in the correct

is not aligned properly. position.

The copy has lines.

The copy has dark

specks or spots.

The FBS glass surface is dirty.

Wipe the FBS glass clean with a soft dry cloth.

. . . or . . .

The FBS pad is dirty.

Wipe the FBS pad clean with a soft cloth dampened with

alcohol.

Place the original correctly on the FBS glass against the

original width scale. Or, load it into the ADF correctly along

the document guide.

. . . or . . .

The original documents may not be suitable for use in the

ADF.

Raise the platen cover and place the originals on the FBS

glass one at a time, instead of using the ADF.

. . . or . . .

The original your document is very thin or highly trans-

parent.

Place a blank sheet of paper over the original.

. . . or . . .

Something is sticking to the original document.

Wipe the FBS glass clean with a soft dry cloth.

The original your document is 2-sided.

The information on the back side of a 2-sided, thin origi-

nal may be slightly reproduced on the copy. Adjust the

image contrast level lighter by pressing CONTRAST key.

5.16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

Reception errors

Errors

R.1.1 The calling fax machine didn’t respond to your fax machine. This can hap-

pen if someone dials a wrong number or if the remote machine restricts

access through use of a passcode.

When sending faxes, your machine occasionally runs into communication errors.

These can be caused by anything from lightning to telephone line interference.

(These same factors cause static, or line noise, you sometimes hear on phone calls.)

They also can be caused by problems with the fax machine at the other end of the

line.

R.1.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your fax machine sends and

receives only ITU-T Group 3 (see Glossary, page AI.7) fax communication, the

industry standard since the early 1980s.

Often, simply trying your call again is all that’s necessary. However, if the problem

persists regularly, call your local telephone company for help. If that doesn’t help and

the problem persists regularly, call your authorized Muratec dealer.

R.1.4 Someone pressed STOP at the receiving fax machine.

R.1.5 The fax machine didn’t detect the silence at the end of the call for receiving

an RCR.

Error reports

R.2.3 Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Call some-

When an error occurs, your fax machine prints an error report. Each fax error report

lists an error message which includes:

one at the remote machine’s location.

R.3.1 The sending fax machine detected too many errors from the receiving

fax machine.

•

A possible solution to the problem

The sending location (if the remote fax stores a Location ID of its own)

The result — which is a special error code.

A sample of the document’s first page.

R.3.3 The sending fax machine is incompatible or had a document feeder problem

during transmission.

R.3.4 Poor phone line conditions may have prevented your fax machine from prop-

erly printing some or all of the pages it received.

Kinds of error codes

The error code listed in the “Result” column of the error report indicates the specific

problem encountered:

R.4.2 Either the line disconnected before transmission or the transmitting fax

machine needs maintenance.

R.4.4 The fax machine has reached its memory capacity.

•

“

D” codes — Occur while dialing

R.5.1, ECM reception failed (perhaps due to line noise).

R.5.2

R” codes — Occur during reception

T” codes — Occur during transmission

R.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.

R.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.

R.8.11 The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal.

Specific errors

Following are some error codes you may see on an error report:

Dialing errors

Transmission errors

D.0.3, The remote unit didn’t respond, the call couldn’t be completed or STOP was

D.0.8 pressed during dialing. Retry the call. If your machine repeats the message,

call the remote fax unit’s operator and verify that unit is operating properly.

T.1.1 The remote fax machine didn’t respond to your machine. Call someone at the

remote machine’s location.

T.1.2 Your fax machine’s page counter detected a possible document feeder error.

D.0.2 The remote unit is busy. Try the call again.

Carefully put the document back into the feeder and try the call again.

D.0.6, Either the remote unit didn’t respond, the call somehow didn’t go through or

D.0.7 STOP was pressed during dialing. Try the call again.

T.2.1 Either the phone line disconnected during transmission or fax communica-

tion became impossible due to bad phone line conditions. Try the call again.

T.2.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your fax machine sends and

receives only ITU-T Group 3 (see “Glossary,” page AI.7) fax communication,

the industry standard since the early 1980s.

5.17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

T.2.3 Bad phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Conditions

“Check Message” printouts

When there’s a problem with a fax call and your machine detects an error, it pro-

duces an error printout headed by the words “Check Message.” This printout lists

the following information about the transmission:

can change rapidly, so try the call again later.

T.3.1

The page counter in your fax machine detected a document feeder error dur-

ing transmission. Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try

the call.

•

The resulting error code

T.3.2

The fax machine didn’t detect the silence indicating the call had ended.

A communications error message (see “What error messages can mean,” below)

T.4.1 The telephone line disconnected during transmission because of excessive

The phone number (or TTI, if programmed) of the fax machine with which your

machine had attempted to communicate.

modem errors or because remote unit ran out of paper. Try the call again.

T.4.2 After transmission began, poor line conditions developed. Try the call again.

What error messages can mean

T.4.4

Poor line conditions prevented transmission. Try the call again.

The error messages on Check Message printouts can mean a variety of things.

Here’s a brief summary:

T.5.1, ECM transmission failed (perhaps due to line noise). Conditions can change

T.5.2, rapidly, so try the call again later.

T.5.3

Er r or m essa ge

Possible m ea n in gs

T.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.

Check condition of remote fax. • Remote machine malfunctioned

• No “handshake” signals from remote fax

T.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.

T.8.11 The remote fax machine didn’t complete the equalizer training phase.

• Wrong phone number reached

Repeat transmission.

• Poor phone line conditions

• No “handshake” signals from remote fax

• Document misfeed or miscount

• Unable to reach remote machine after

attempting specified number of redial tries

Line is busy.

• Remote machine’s line was busy

• Remote machine’s line didn’t answer

Check received documents.

• Remote confirmation signal not received

from remote fax

• Poor line conditions caused a poor image

Memory full.

• Remote fax’s memory is full

Dialing number is not set.

Stopped.

• Stored phone number failed to dial properly

• Someone pressed STOP at the remote fax

in the middle of the “handshake”

5.18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

Common questions

Sending faxes

Q: Sometimes, I try to send a fax while using either the optional handset or the

MONITOR/CALL feature. But, when the other side answers, I hear a horrible

screeching sound, so I hang up. What’s happening?

We’re here to help you!

The Muratec Information System is available to you 24 hours a day, 7 days a

week. You can use your fax machine to call this “fax-on-demand” system and

receive printouts of information, such as the most common questions asked

about your machine. Often, this is the fastest way to find out the answer to

any question you may have. And it’s a free call!

A: That was the other fax machine trying to say “Hello” to your machine! You’ll

hear sounds like that any time you call a fax machine which is set to answer

automatically (as when you set your machine to Auto Answer mode). It’s by

using these tones that fax machines are able to send faxes over ordinary phone

lines. So, next time you hear the tones, press START (and, if you’re using an

optional handset, hang up) to send a fax.

To use the Muratec Information System:

On your fax machine, press MONITOR/CALL to get a dial tone, or lift

your optional handset.

Q: I just sent a fax. However, the number that appeared in my machine’s display

Call 1-800-215-1698.

during the transmission wasn’t the number I dialed. Why?

Follow the voice instructions you’ll receive from the system.

A: That number you saw is programmed into the remote fax machine by the user.

Some users prefer different numbers to appear than the ones they’re really

using. And some people don’t know how to change the number once it’s set.

General questions

Q: Where do I add ink or toner to make my fax machine’s printouts darker?

Q: Can I transmit and receive at the same time?

A: No. Use the call request feature (see page 3.43) to ask the person at the remote

fax machine if he or she wants to transmit or receive after your fax communica-

tion is complete.

A: You can’t adjust the darkness of an incoming fax printout, but you can adjust

the darkness of a copy or of a transmission. Insert a document and press CON-

TRAST to adjust the contrast setting. “Dark” prints at the darkest setting. The

machine will reset automatically to normal contrast after you finish copying or

sending the fax.

Q: Do I have to dial a 1 for a long-distance call?

A: Yes. Dialing a fax number is just like dialing any other phone number, so be

sure to include any special long-distance codes or dialing pauses when dialing.

Also, remember to include them when you set your autodialer numbers.

Q: When I unplug my machine or if the power goes off, will I lose the information

I’ve stored — such as my TTI, autodialer entries, the time and date, etc. — and

have to re-enter them?

A: No. There’s a special battery built into your fax machine which protects user

settings for several days if power fails or if you decide to move your machine.

However, we do advise you to restore power to the machine as soon as possible.

Q: How do I send a fax to an overseas telephone number?

A: Dialing requirements for international calls may vary depending on your local

telephone company’s requirements. For most international calls, call 011, then

dial the appropriate country code, city code and phone number. (You may find

country and city codes in the front section of your telephone directory.)

Q: Can I use a dust cover on my fax machine?

A: No! A dust cover blocks air circulation, which could cause your machine to over-

heat.

Q: Can I transmit if my fax machine runs out of paper?

A: Yes, but confirmation reports (see page 3.40) aren’t available when you trans-

mit without recording paper in your fax machine.

5.19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

Q: Can I transmit a document that’s extra long?

Q: The specifications (page AI.2) list an average per-page transmission time, but

when I transmit a page it can take much longer. Why?

A: Yes, if the receiving fax machine is equipped to handle long documents. Many

machines have a special setting which allows them to receive documents that

exceed the normal length.

A: We base this specification on transmission of an industry-standard test docu-

ment called ITU-T Test Document 1 (sometimes also called the “Slerexe letter”).

Fax manufacturers use this method to test transmission speeds. However:

Q: Can I transmit a page from a newspaper?

•

The pages you send may be darker, or otherwise contain more information,

than ITU-T Test Document 1.

A: No. A newspaper page can jam in your document feeder. First, use a copy

machine to make an appropriately sized copy of the newspaper page, then

transmit the copy.

•

The transmission time measured for test documents doesn’t include hand-

shake time — the time during which two fax machines “introduce”

themselves to each other and “agree on” the parameters of the call.

Q: Can I transmit a page with correction fluid on it?

•

The specification time is based on the use of normal resolution mode. You

may be using fine, superfine or grayscale transmission, each of which takes

longer than normal mode.

A: Yes, but only if the fluid is completely dry before you begin transmission.

Q: How can I be sure my fax was received?

Q: What’s a default?

A: Set your machine to print a confirmation report after each transmission (see

A: A default is a setting that your machine will always refer to if nothing else is

programmed. For example, you can set the default for this machine to send a

fax by using its memory. If you set this action as the default, that’s how your

machine will always send a fax, until you tell it to do differently.

pages 3.40–3.41).

Q: I don’t want to install a dedicated phone line for my fax machine, so I’ve con-

nected the machine to a PBX phone system. When I get a fax call, all the phones

ring. How do I prevent this?

A: Call your PBX manufacturer or telephone company for assistance. They may be

able to convert one of the PBX lines for use only by your fax machine.

Reports

Q: Sometimes when I dial a fax call by using either the optional handset or

MONITOR/CALL, I don’t hear the fax receiving tones from the other machine.

Am I doing something wrong?

Q: I called the number 011-555-555-1212, but not all of the digits appear on my

transmit confirmation report (TCR). Why didn’t the whole number appear? How

can I be sure my document went to the right location?

A: When this happens, try pressing START (and then hanging up the optional

handset if you’re using it), as usual. It’s possible you’re calling an older, non-

standard fax machine that doesn’t emit answering tones. Even a few Group 3

faxes (see “Glossary,” page AI.7) on the market sound a sending tone but don’t

sound a receiving tone. After you transmit, call the person at the other fax

machine’s location to see if that person got your document.

A: The numbers you enter using the fax keypad are temporarily stored in a mem-

ory “buffer”, and it’s only the last part of the phone number that the buffer

“remembers.” An easy way to avoid getting incomplete telephone numbers on

your printouts is to store your most frequently used numbers as one-touch keys

or speed-dial numbers. These autodialer numbers will appear in their entirety

on your TCR.

Q: I inserted a document in the feeder and dialed a fax number, but my machine

didn’t transmit the document. Instead, “** Auto Redial **” now appears on

my LCD. What does this mean?

A: The remote fax machine was busy, so your machine will try the call again, auto-

matically. As long as it hasn’t stored more than 99 delayed commands (counting

automatic redials), your machine should still accept commands from you. If it

has exceeded this quantity and will accept no more commands, try cancelling

one of the delayed commands (see page 3.29). If the machine still won’t cooper-

ate, keep cancelling commands until it does.

5.20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just in case

Receiving faxes

Q: My fax never answers. What’s wrong?

Polling

Q: What’s the purpose of polling?

A: Check to make sure your fax machine is properly connected to a working AC

power outlet and phone jack. If you’re using a second phone with your machine,

make sure it’s connected properly.

A: Polling lets you automatically “pull” a document which is set in another fax

machine. You can poll whenever you need to retrieve information and don’t

want the source to pay for the phone call. With polling, you pay for the call and

get the information you need.

Q: Sometimes when I answer my machine with the optional handset, I hear a

beeping sound that repeats every few seconds. Is this a fax?

A: Yes. When you hear these fax tones, someone is trying to send you a fax. Next

How your fax machine works

How a fax machine works is simple:

time, press START and hang up the handset. Your fax will receive the message.

Q: Does my fax machine have to be plugged in to the AC power jack to receive a

You put a page into your fax machine’s feeder and call a fax number. Your machine

makes a satisfactory connection with the other machine, and then …

message?

A: Yes. Your phone will ring if the phone line is connected, but you can’t receive a

fax unless your fax machine is plugged into both the phone jack and the AC

power jack. Make sure your fax machine is always plugged in so you never miss

an important fax message.

•

Your machine takes the document.

An image scanner in your fax machine examines the information on the page.

•

Your machine wraps the document.

Your fax machine translates the scanned information into a numeric code and

compresses the code for the fastest possible transmission speed.

Q: Can I receive a fax if I’m using the phone on my machine?

•

Your machine sends the document.

Finally, your fax machine sends the compressed code.

A: You can receive a fax from the person to whom you’re talking. When that per-

son has a document ready in his/her machine’s feeder, press START.

On the other end of the line …

•

The remote fax machine receives the code.

Working with your answering machine

Your machine unwraps the document.

The remote fax machine uncompresses and deciphers the code, turning it into a

representation of the scan your machine made.

Q: People have complained that they call my fax machine and hear my answering

machine’s message, but are cut off before they can send a fax. What happened?

A: Any remote fax machine attempting to send a fax must “hear” responding fax

tones within 40 seconds after the person at that machine presses the start key.

That 40 seconds includes getting the dial tone, dialing the number, “listening”

to the pause before the ringing starts and the remote fax machine answering

the ring. Only after that time does your message play.

•

The remote fax machine prints the representation.

The only difference between a regular telephone call and a fax call is the content of

the transmission:

That’s why we urge you to create a short outgoing message. The shorter the

waiting period, the more likely it is that the remote fax machine will proceed

with the transmission. Please create an outgoing message on your answering

machine that’s no longer than 10 seconds (see page 3.8 for a suggestion).

•

On a regular call, your telephone sends your voice.

On a fax call, your fax machine sends a coded image.

The way fax machines work is regulated closely by the International

Telecommunications Union (ITU), an agency of the United Nations. The standards the

ITU applies ensure the compatibility of your fax machine with millions of other

machines worldwide. However, they also limit the way you can use your machine

with other devices, such as telephones and answering machines.

5.21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix and index

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.1

Combination chart for copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.4

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.6

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix and index

Specifications

Bypass tray;

Copy: Letter

Ma in u n it

, Legal , Ledger

, A3 , B4 , A4

, A6 , F4 , Postcard

Half-letter

B5 , A5

Gen er a l

Custom-sized((W)5.5″-17.0″ × (L)3.6″-11.7″),

Type:

Console

OPC

DL , COM10 , Monarch , Executive

Photo conductor:

Copying system:

Paper capacity:

Multi purpose cassette;

Electrostatic Dry Powdered Image Transfer to Plain

Paper

Plain Paper(20 lb) : 275 sheets

Custom-sized paper, Card, OHP, Label: 20 sheets

2nd paper cassette;

Plain Paper(20 lb) : 550 sheets

Bypass tray;

Developing system:

Fusing system:

Micro-Toning High-Grade System

Lamp-Heated Roller

CCD

Scanning system:

Document size :

Plain Paper(16-24 lb), Custom-sized paper, Card,

OHP, Label: 1 sheet

(width × length)

ADF:

Total memory capacity:

Memory backup time:

16 MB(standard), 24 MB, 40 MB, 56 MB

Maximum 11.0 inches × 17.0 inches,

Minimum 5.8 inches × 5.0 inches

(Total memory capacity: Backup time)

16 MB: 60 hours

24 MB: 36 hours, 40 MB: 12 hours, 56 MB: 5 hours

(Must be charged for at least 48 hours to reach full

charge)

FBS:

Maximum 11.0 inches × 17.0 inches

ADF capacity:

50 sheets (20lb bond paper)

Document thickness:

Single scanning:

42-128 g/m²

Power requirement:

Power consumption:

Power: 120V ± 10%, 50–60 Hz.

Auto power off mode:

Sleep mode:

Standby:

Memory Transmit:

Receive:

4.7 W

44 W

170 Wh

84 W

920 W

1000 W

Duplex scanning:

50-128 g/m²

Printing paper size:

Multi purpose cassette;

Fax: Letter

Half-letter

Copy: Letter

Half-letter

B5 , A5

, Legal , Ledger

Copy:

Maximum:

, Legal , Ledger

, A3 , B4 , A4

, A6 , F4 , Postcard

Weight:

156.2 lb (71.0 Kg)

Dimensions :

Width 23.9 × Depth 27.2 × Height 30.6 (inches)

Custom-sized((W)5.5″-17.0″ × (L)3.6″-11.7″),

Environmental temperature: 50ºF to 95ºF (10ºC to 35ºC)

DL , COM10 , Monarch , Executive

Relative humidity:

Drum cartridge life:

Toner bottle life:

15 to 85% RH

2nd paper cassette;

Fax: Letter

, Legal , Ledger

74,000 prints or more

Copy: Letter

11,000 prints or more

Based on 6% document coverage and three-page interval printing.

A3 , B4 , A4

, F4

AI.1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix & index

Dual access:

Multitasking

Grayscale:

256-level

Document set:

ADF: Face Up

FBS: Face down

Receive reduction print:

Auto (Variable from 100% to 25% by 1% ratio)

Fixed (100%, 97%, 91%, 81% or 75%)

Original reference position:

Paper exit system:

Printing margin:

Center

Enlarge transmission***:

Variable from 100% to 400% by 1% ratio

Fixed (154%, 129%, 121%)

Face down exit system

Upper: 4 mm, Lower: 4 mm, Right: 4 mm, Left: 4 mm

Yes

Cop y

Smoothing print:

Printing resolution:

Warm-up time:

First Copy Output Time:

Print speed:

600 dpi (horizontal) × 600 dpi (vertical)

60 sec. or less

Receiving paper tray capacity: 250 sheets

5.7 sec. (Based on Letter

25 ppm (Based on Letter

1 to 99 copies

)

Fa x com m u n ica tion

)

Compatibility:

Modem speed:

ITU-T Super Group 3, Group3

Multiple copies:

Scanning resolution:

33,600, 31,200, 28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600,

19,200, 16,800, 14,400, 12,000, 9,600, 7,200, 4,800,

2,400 bps

(horizontal × vertical):

Copy:

Normal

Fine

Superfine

N/A

Transmission speed:

Phone system:

Under 3 seconds per page*

Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or

equivalent

600 dpi × 600 lpi

Grayscale 600 dpi × 600 lpi

Variable from 25% to 400% by 1% ratio

Fixed (154%, 129%, 121%, 77%, 64%, 50%)

Coding method:

ITU-T-standard J BIG, MMR and MR, Murata-pro-

prietary MSE.

Reduce and enlarge:***

Scanning speed:

Scanning resolution:

(horizontal × vertical):

Transmission:

Copy:

Super Fine:

Grayscale:

Other (400 dpi): 1.8 sec/page

Based on letter-sized sheets.

2.6 sec/page

Normal

Fine

Superfine

203 × 98 dpi

203 × 196 dpi

406 × 392 dpi**

Grayscale 203 × 196 dpi (Memory Tx)

406 × 392 dpi** (Feeder Tx)

Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax machine. Your transmission times will vary,

but your fax machine always will provide the fastest transmission speeds possible under ITU-T guidelines and

phone-line conditions.

One-touch dial:

78 locations

Speed Dial:

222 locations

** In the case that the remote fax has the ability of “406 × 392”.

If not, the superfine resolution is “203 × 392”, and the grayscale resolution in feeder transmission is “203 × 196”.

Error Correction Mode:

Polling/Broadcasting:

Scanning width:

Scanning speed:

Yes

*** Enlargement is available only with FBS.

330 locations / 330 locations

Letter/Legal; 8.4 inches, Ledger;10.9 inches

Transmission:

Normal:

Fine:

0.8 sec/page

Super Fine: 1.7 sec/page

Grayscale:

0.8 sec/page (Memory Tx)

1.7 sec/page (Feeder Tx)

Based on letter-sized sheets.

AI.2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix and index

Sh ift Tr a y

Op tion

Shift home position:

Shift position:

Paper capacity:

Rear of unit

40 mm

Pa p er Feed Un it (3r d , 4th , 5th p a p er ca ssette)

Plain Paper(16-24 lb) : 250 sheets

Custom-sized paper, Card, OHP, Label: 20 sheets

Printing paper size:

Transmission: Letter

, Legal , Ledger

Copy: Letter

Power source:

Power consumption:

Weight:

Supplied from Main unit

A3 , B4 , A4

, F4

26W or less

Paper capacity:

Power source:

Power consumption:

Weight:

Plain Paper(16-24 lb) : 550 sheets

Supplied from Main unit

10W or less

15 pounds

Dimensions :

Width 19.25 × Depth 22 × Height 8 (inches)

15.25 pounds

2-Bin Tr a y

Dimensions :

Width 21 × Depth 21.5 × Height 5 (inches)

Paper capacity:

First tray;

Plain Paper(16-24 lb) : 100 sheets

Second tray (Paper tray of the main unit);

Plain Paper(16-24 lb) : 250 sheets

Custom-sized paper, Card, OHP, Label: 20 sheets

La r ge Ca p a city Ca ssette

Printing paper size:

Paper capacity:

Letter , A4 , B5

Plain Paper(16-24 lb) : 2,700 sheets

Supplied from Main unit

45W

Power source:

Power consumption:

Weight:

Supplied from Main unit

26W or less

Power source:

Power consumption:

Weight:

10.25 pounds

36.75 pounds

Dimensions :

Width 19.25 × Depth 19.75 × Height 8 (inches)

Dimensions :

Width 21 × Depth 21.5 × Height 11.25 (inches)

Du p lex Un it

Printing paper size:

Power source:

Power consumption:

Weight:

Letter

, Legal , Ledger , Half-letter

Supplied from Main unit

21W or less

4.5 pounds

Dimensions :

Width 2.25 × Depth 16.25 × Height 10 (inches)

Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice.

AI.3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix & index

Combination chart for copy functions

Directional

Selecting

Duplex Copy

Scanning

from

Combine Repeat

Maginification

recording paper

Multi copy

Function you select last

Function you select first

Scanning from

FBS glass

ADF

FBS & ADF

Mix Length document

Multi copy

Sort

Non sort

Shift non sort

Shift sort

Binding margin

Erase border

Erase center

TopUp Copy

Negative/Positive

Last job

2 pages –> 1-sided

4 pages –> 1-sided

8 pages –> 1-sided

2 repeat

4 repeat

8 repeat

Combine

Repeat

Series copies

1-sided –> 2-sided

2-sided –> 2-sided

2-sided –> 1-sided

Book (Face)

Book (F/B)

Booklet

Duplex Copy

Directional Magnification (%)

Directional Size Magnification (inch)

Directional

magnification

Auto paper select

Selecting

recording paper

Manual paper select (standard paper)

Manual paper select (other paper)

Special sized paper select

Auto Reduce/Enlarge

Preset Reduce/Enlarge

Zoom

Reduce/Enlarge

Bypass tray

Multipurpose cassette

Paper cassette

Slecting

paper cassette

Large capacity cassette

Plain paper

Others

Paper tray

2-Bin tray

Enhanced copy (DocEnhance)

Slecting paper type

Slecting output tray

Soft Key

AI.4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix and index

Selecting

Slecting

Soft

Key

Reduce/Enlarge

paper type

output tray

paper cassette

Function you select last

Function you select first

Scanning from

FBS glass

ADF

FBS & ADF

Mix Length document

Multi copy

Sort

Non sort

Shift non sort

Shift sort

Binding margin

Erase border

Erase center

TopUp Copy

Negative/Positive

Last job

2 pages –> 1-sided

4 pages –> 1-sided

8 pages –> 1-sided

2 repeat

Combine

Repeat

4 repeat

8 repeat

Series copies

1-sided –> 2-sided

2-sided –> 2-sided

2-sided –> 1-sided

Book (Face)

Duplex Copy

Book (F/B)

Booklet

Directional Magnification (%)

Directional Size Magnification (inch)

Directional

magnification

Auto paper select

Selecting

recording paper

Manual paper select (standard paper)

Manual paper select (other paper)

Special sized paper select

Auto Reduce/Enlarge

Preset Reduce/Enlarge

Zoom

Reduce/Enlarge

Bypass tray

Multipurpose cassette

Paper cassette

Large capacity cassette

Plain paper

Others

Paper tray

2-Bin tray

Enhanced copy (DocEnhance)

Blank : means that these functions can be used together.

: means that these functions cannot be used together.

: means that the function you select last will be available.

Slecting

paper cassette

: means that the function you select first will be available.

Slecting paper type

: If the document size is changed during scanning,

the reduce/enlarge ratio should be selected manually.

: The copies are delivered to the lower tray.

: Only 25%–100% is available.

Slecting paper output

Soft Key

AI.5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix & index

Glossary

This glossary contains terms you may encounter when discussing or reading about fax

machines. Please use these definitions for reference only. A list of definitions can also be found

on the Muratec website at www.muratec.com.

Br oa d ca st — A fax transmission in which a single document is sent to more than one location.

bp s — Bits per second. Used to express the speed of transmission of data. Because fax transmis-

sion treats a document as a graphic image rather than as a series of alphabetic and numeric

characters, bps does n ot correspond to the number of characters transmitted per second.

24-h ou r for m a t — Also called military format. A format for keeping time that does not use

a.m. or p.m. to distinguish between morning and afternoon. In the 24-hour format, one o’clock in

the morning marks 1:00, noon marks 12:00 and midnight marks 24:00. To calculate the 24-hour

format, add 12 hours to all times after noon.

Byte — A group of digital elements, usually sent as eight bits to the byte.

Ca ll r eser ve — Also called call request. An ITU-T standard fax feature which allows a user to

request voice communication prior to, during or after transmission.

Ca ll-w a itin g ser vice — An optional telephone company service that alerts you to another

incoming call when the phone is already in use. Call-waiting signals often cause interruption of

fax transmission or reception.

For example, 1:30 p.m. would be 13:30 in the 24-hour format; 10:45 p.m. would be 22:45 in the

24-hour format. And 11:15 a.m. would be 11:15 in the 24-hour format.

A3, A4, B4 — Standard stationery sizes defined by the International Standards Organization,

an agency of the United Nations. See also Paper sizes.

Ca ller ID — Optional service provided by your local telephone company that allows you to see a

display of the number (phone or fax) that is calling.

ADF — Automatic document feeder. See document feeder.

CCITT — See ITU-T

Alter n a te n u m ber — The number your machine dials after all attempts to the regular number

fails. The user programs this alternate number, if so desired.

CCD, CIS — Charged coupled device, contact image sensor. Two types of scanning mechanisms

used in some Muratec fax machines. The CCD “reads” fluorescent light bouncing off a document.

The CIS uses a flat bar of light-emitting diodes (LEDs).

An sw er in g m a ch in e — See TAD.

Au tod ia lin g — Enables user to store preprogrammed telephone numbers in the unit’s memory.

Com m a n d qu eu e — The “list” your machine keeps of all its pending commands.

Storage capability varies from unit to unit.

Com m a n d n u m ber — The number your machine gives to each “job” it is programmed to com-

plete. You must know the command number in order to cancel or change any of the machine’s

jobs that it stores.

Au tom a tic fa llba ck — The ability of a fax machine to slow down (“fall back”), when communi-

cating with another fax which is communicating at a slower rate.

Au tom a tic r ed u ction — Many Muratec fax machines will automatically reduce the size of

documents being transmitted to accommodate the effective printing width of the receiving unit.

For example, this allows a fax machine with a 10″ scanning width to send an image 10″ wide to

a unit with an 8.5″ print width. The receiving fax machine will receive a reduced-size printout of

the complete image.

Com p a tibility — The term “compatible” describes the ability of separate things to function

together. Your Muratec fax machine features ITU-T Group 3 compatibility, the modern standard

for worldwide communication.

Con fid en tia l tr a n sm ission — See SecureMail.

Con fir m a tion r ep or t — See RCR and TCR.

Bit — The smallest unit of information in a computer. Some Muratec fax machines, which are

actually computers “dedicated” to telecommunications, allow users to change bits of information

to provide or cancel features through software settings.

Con tin u ou s p ollin g — See Polling.

Cop y m od e — Allows your fax machine to be used as a convenience copier.

Cover p a ge (a u tom a tic) — A small, user-created message; can be the first page of every

transmission.

Bits p er secon d — See bps.

Bla ck d en sity — Also called black coverage. The amount of non-white area on a page. For

example, most regular office correspondence has a black density well under 10%, due to the

presence of margins, spaces between words, spaces between lines and paragraphs and even

spaces within letters. However, drawings and photographs have a much higher black density,

sometimes approaching 100%. The higher a page’s black density, the more slowly a fax machine

sends it.

Da ta ba se p ollin g — See Polling.

Da ta com p r ession — Used in digital fax machines to speed transmission. See also Digital fax,

MH and MSE, SMSE.

AI.6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix and index

Gr a ysca le — Not a level of resolution, but a method of scanning and transmitting halftone

images. Fax machines with grayscale abilities interpret photographs in levels of gray between

white and black. The transmitting fax machine must have grayscale ability to send a photo-

graphic image accurately, but the receiving machine does not need it to print the image.

Defa u lt — The setting your machine will always refer to if no other action has been pro-

grammed. For example, you can set the default for this machine to send a fax by using its

memory. If you set this action as the default, that’s how your machine will always send a fax,

until you tell it differently.

Dela yed com m a n d — Transmission or polling operation set by the user to occur later, auto-

matically, at a predetermined time. Great for reducing costs by making fax calls during times

when telephone costs are lowest, such as late at night or on weekends.

Gr ou p 3 — Refers to fax machines that use digital encoding. These units transmit one page

in less than one minute and produce resolution of 203 × 98, 203 × 196, or 406 × 392 lpi.

Ha lfton e — See Grayscale.

Digita l — Using the binary system (which uses a combination of 0s or 1s) to describe every-

thing, so that 0 means off and 1 means on; digital fax machines convert the graphic image of

your document into a series of zeros and ones by using the binary system of transmission to

encode black and white occurrences. This increases transmission speed by passing over white

spaces. See also White-line skip.

Ha n d sh a k in g — An exchange of data between telecommunications and/or

computer equipment that “introduces” two systems to each other. For example, faxes use a

handshaking protocol to identify the ITU-T group of each unit and to begin fax communication.

Hu b — See Relay broadcasting.

Hz (or Her tz) — A measure of frequency equal to one cycle per second. Used in the specifica-

tions for a fax machine, it identifies the AC power the unit requires.

Digita l fa x — Unlike analog systems that scan every portion of a document, digital fax

machines survey a document’s overall picture content. Digital fax machines scan a line and

convert the information into a binary code of zeros and ones. The fax machine takes this

information and compresses it, providing high transmission speeds. Many Muratec units

offer proprietary methods for faster transmissions between Muratec-manufactured units (see

also MSE, SMSE).

ITU-T — International Telecommunications Union – Telecommunications Sector. (Formerly

known as CCITT, for Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone.) A

telecommunications forum for member countries of the United Nations whose Study Group

XIV established the primary groups for fax equipment, covering communication protocol and

transmission. Muratec Group 3 fax machines offer the fastest transmissions allowed by the

ITU-T when communicating with other Group 3 units.

DIP sw itch es — Dual in-line package switch; a two-position on/off switch. Many Muratec fax

machines include DIP switches to control optional settings or features.

ITU-T Test Docu m en t 1 — Also called the Slerexe (“slehr-rehks”) letter; An ITU-T standard

document with a known black density which fax makers often use to test transmission

speeds of their fax machines. Published transmission speeds are also based on this document.

Docu m en t feed er — The adjustable slot into which users place documents for faxing or

copying.

Effective p r in tin g w id th — The widest image that can be printed on a fax.

ITU-T V.29 a n d V.27 ter. — A standard set of communication procedures allowing fax

machines to talk to all other units adhering to those standards.

Effective sca n w id th — The maximum width the scanner in a fax can scan during trans-

mission.

J BIG — Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, the new ITU-T standard image data compression

method. As J BIG compresses the data more efficiently than MMR, it is especially effective when

transmitting halftone (grayscale) image document.

F -Cod e — A fax-industry standard created by the ITU-T for sub-addressing/password-based

communications. Because F-Code is an industry standard, Muratec fax machines as well as

all ITU-T equipped fax machines from other manufacturers can communicate with each other

using sub-addressing.

(Of course, the compression ratio may vary with the image data.)

La ser p r in tin g — A plain-paper printing system. Toner is attached to a charged drum and

an image is transferred onto plain paper through electrical currents, then fused with heat

and pressure to produce a dry, permanent printout.

Fa csim ile (or fa x) — A form of communication involving the scanning and decoding of a docu-

ment into electrical signals and transmitting of the document, over telephone lines to another

device. This device then reconstructs the signals to produce an exact duplicate of the document.

Also, a machine that performs such communication.

LCD — Liquid crystal display. Used on some Muratec units for status displays.

Lea sed lin e — See Private line.

Fa llba ck — Group 3 fax machines operate at the highest transmission speed possible on a

given telephone line. Muratec systems offer automatic fallback; if line quality drops during

transmission, the fax machine will reduce speed to the fastest possible level.

Loa d n u m ber — A number assigned to telecommunications equipment used in Canada;

designed to help prevent overloading on a telephone circuit. See also Ringer equivalence num-

ber.

File n u m ber — A number the machine gives to each document it stores for a batch, F-Code

or polling operation.

Loca tion ID — See Station ID.

lp i — Lines per inch. The way fax image resolution is measured. (For example, see Normal

resolution.)

Fin e r esolu tion — 203H × 196V lpi. Also shown as

(“Group 3 fine”) on some fax units.

AI.7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix & index

Mem or y — Internal document storage. In Muratec fax machines, random access memory in

Pa p er sizes — All are width × length:

the form of computer chips is used to store and hold documents for transmission and to hold

some documents that have been received.

Letter-sized = 8.5″ ×11.0″ (216 × 279 mm)

A5 = 5.8″ × 8.3″ (148 × 210 mm)

A4 = 8.3″ ×11.7″ (210 × 297 mm)

A3 = 11.7″ ×16.5″ (297 × 420 mm)

Legal-sized = 8.5″ ×14.0″ (216 × 356 mm)

B5 = 7.2″ ×10.1″ (182 × 257 mm)

B4 = 10.1″ ×14.3″ (257 × 364 mm)

Mem or y over flow — A message that appears on the machine’s LCD when the

current operation requires more of the machine’s electronic memory than what is available.

Pa sscod e — A four-digit code-number. On your fax machine, the protection passcode lets the

user limit access to fax operations, as well as certain settings and even documents readied for

polling (in the case of polling, only calling machines whose users enter the proper passcode

will be able to poll the document.)

MH — Modified Huffman, the standard ITU-T Group 3 data compression method. A one-dimen-

sional coding scheme that compresses data in a horizontal direction only. A feature of all

Muratec fax machines, MH assures transmissions faster than one page per minute when com-

municating with other Group 3 units, regardless of

manufacturer. See also MR, MMR, MSE, SMSE.

P BX (or PABX) — Private branch exchange; privately-owned telephone equipment serving a

particular building, business or area. Many PBX systems use digital transmission lines which,

unlike more common PSTN lines, are not compatible with fax machine use. The user should

not connect a fax unit to a PBX without first checking with the system manufacturer or ser-

vice representative.

Milita r y for m a t — See 24-hour format.

Mod em — Modulator-demodulator. A device that converts digital data, like information from

a fax machine, into an analog signal for transmission over ordinary telephone lines. A modem

is included in a fax machine and allows it to be connected directly to a PSTN telephone line.

P CL — Page Control Language. An industry standard for printer control. Some Muratec fax

machines include or offer PCL-compatible printing for Windows-based personal computers.

MR — Modified Read, an ITU-T Group 3 standard data compression method. A two-dimen-

sional coding scheme that compresses data in both horizontal and vertical directions and

allows for faster transmission when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless of

manufacturer. See also MH, MMR, MSE, SMSE.

P la ten — A traditional copier-style top to a fax machine or digital copier. Some Muratec fax

machines and multifunctional products include a platen top, allowing you to fax from books

and other awkward sources.

MMR — Modified Modified Read, an ITU-T Group 3 standard data compression method. A two-

dimensional coding scheme that compresses data in both horizontal and vertical directions

and allows for faster transmission when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless

of manufacturer. See also MH, MR, MSE, SMSE.

Pollin g — Automatic transmission to a calling remote fax, or reception of a document from a

remote fax set for this operation. Polling is convenient whenever a central unit must receive

information from one or several remote faxes. The caller bears all telephone charges and pre-

vents several remote units from calling at the same time. See also Secure polling.

Mon itor — A speaker in most Muratec fax machines which allows the user to hear the dial-

ing process. This is not a speakerphone, because it has no microphone for speaking to the

person being called. For regular two-way voice communication, users must use the optional

handset. See also On-hook dialing.

P r iva te lin e — (Or leased line.) A service offered by many telephone systems; provides an

exclusive phone circuit between two geographic points. A Muratec fax does not require a pri-

vate line. See also PSTN.

P r op r ieta r y — Non-standard. In fax, refers to a feature which works only in communica-

tions between fax machines that are the same brand.

MSE, SMSE — Muratec’s proprietary data compression methods, allowing a Muratec-manufac-

tured fax machine to transmit more quickly when communicating with another

Muratec-manufactured unit. MSE and SMSE are features on many Muratec fax machines. See

also MH, MR, MMR.

P STN — Public switched telephone network; the most common type of telephone lines and

service in use, in contrast to private or leased lines. A Muratec fax provides fast, reliable data

transmission over a PSTN line, and does not need a special or dedicated telephone line. See

also Private line.

Qu a d Access^®— Muratec’s QuadAccess allows your Muratec fax machine to perform four or

more tasks simultaneously without slowing.

Nor m a l r esolu tion — Shown as “norm”; 203H × 98V lpi. The default resolution mode for all

Muratec fax machines.

On e-tou ch d ia lin g — Allows the fax user to store frequently used fax numbers for dialing

with the touch of one key. See also Autodialing and Speed-dialing.

RCR — Receive confirmation report. An RCR is your assurance that the document you trans-

mitted was received. The RCR prints after your transmission, identifying the receiving unit

and recording the date, time, transmission mode, number of pages sent and the result. The

RCR is an exclusive feature of Muratec fax machines and is available only when transmitting

to other, compatible Muratec fax machines. See also TCR.

On -h ook d ia lin g — Dialing numbers by using the keypad on the fax unit without lifting a

handset. On most Muratec fax models, the user can do this either silently or by using the

monitor. See also Monitor.

Or igin a l d ocu m en t size — The largest (or smallest) document that can be fed safely

through a fax machine.

Receiver ID — See Station ID.

Over r id e — To change existing settings.

AI.8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix and index

Su p er Gr ou p 3 — An extension of Group 3 fax technology standards, allowing the use of

high-speed v.34 bis modems for 33.6 Kbps transmission and high-speed protocols for rapid

handshaking.

Red ia lin g — The dialing again, either manually or automatically controlled, of the most

recently dialed fax or phone number. Automatic redialing follows an unsuccessful dialing

attempt.

Rela y br oa d ca stin g — Lets some Muratec fax machines store a document in internal mem-

ory, transmits the document to the memory of a remote “hub” fax and then instruct that unit

to relay (re-transmit) the document to each fax in a call group in the “hub” unit. This feature

speeds extremely high-volume fax communication and allows a single command to initiate

document transmission to hundreds of preprogrammed fax locations. It also saves phone

charges for the originating machine. Your machine can initiate a relay broadcast.

Su p er fin e r esolu tion — 203H × 392V lpi. Your Muratec fax machine’s superfine transmis-

sion mode is Group-3-compatible, not the more limited proprietary version.

TAD — Telephone answering device, or answering machine. Records incoming voice messages

for playback. You can connect a TAD to a Muratec fax machine and use the two on one phone

line.

TCR — Transmit confirmation report; this provides proof that your Muratec fax did send the

document you set for transmission. Printed after transmission, the TCR also identifies the

telephone number to which the fax sent the document, plus the actual time of transmission

and how many pages the unit transmitted. See also RCR.

Rem ote fa x m a ch in e — The machine on the other “end” of a fax communication.

REN — See Ringer equivalence number.

Resolu tion — The resolution of documents transmitted or copied by fax machines is mea-

sured by the number of horizontal (H) and vertical (V) lines per inch (lpi) the unit can print. A

Muratec unit may offer one or more of these resolution levels:

Th er m a l (p a p er ) p r in tin g — A thermal head heats chemically treated, thermally sensitive

paper in patterns conforming to the image the machine has scanned, creating a printed

image. Thermal paper’s tendency to discolor and fade, in addition to its curliness and the

usual difficulty in writing on it, have made this method considerably less popular than plain-

paper fax printing — particularly as plain-paper fax machines have dropped sharply in price.

Normal

Fine

Superfine 203H × 392V lpi

203H

203H × 196V lpi

98V lpi

Tr iAccess — Muratec’s TriAccess allows a Muratec fax machine to perform three or more

tasks simultaneously without slowing.

Some Muratec units also offer grayscale transmission (see also Grayscale) for accurate repro-

duction of photographs and other shaded originals.

TTI — Transmit terminal identifier. A user-programmable line of information sent automati-

cally with every page a fax machine sends; it appears at the top of each page printed by the

receiving unit.

Rin ger equ iva len ce n u m ber — Also called REN. A number assigned to telecommunications

equipment used in the United States; designed to prevent overloading on a telephone circuit.